Overview of ERP SAP Introduction What is SAP Landscape SAP General FAQ Basic System Navigation Question SAP

R3 Transaction Codes SAP R3 Tables mySAP Certification Criteria SAP Logistics Modules Material Management Logistics Execution Warehouse Management Sales and Distribution Production Planning and Control Quality Management Plant Maintenance Project System SAP Financial Modules Financial Accounting and Controlling SAP Human Resources Personnel Management

Generic SAP Topics SAP Tickets - What Is That? What Is Maintaining SLA What Are Functional Specification? Role of a SAP Functinal Consultant Role of SAP Consultant In Testing

SAP Books and eBooks Sams Teach Yourself SAP in 24 Hours (3nd Edition) SAP NetWeaver For Dummies Supply Chain Management Based on SAP Systems ... browse more SAP Books

New SAP Tips Just Arrived Roles and Responsibilities of End Extracting Data of Workflow Users Log What Are SAP End User Manual The top ten IT skills to have for the next few years Mini SAP System Requirement and How to Get It What Is User Specific Parameter Implementing SAP R 3 Successfully Implementing SAP Exchange Rate Billing Documents Rebate Management Tables Used Datasource Change Owner Done By Who Options To Handle Manufacturing Materials Restrict Specific Programs In SA38 and SE38 Major Area In Extended warehouse Management Check for Partner on Equipment Master (IE01) What Is SAP Service Management PP/DS Planned Order From APO To ECC Explanation Of LSO Transaction Codes

ABAP/4 FAQ System Administration - Data Dictionary SAP Basis Components - Reporting Administration In SAP - Data Modeler - Dialog Programming ABAP Workbench - SQL/Performance ABAP Programming Hints - SAPscripts BDC Programming Tips - User Exits ABAP Functions Examples - Workbench Organizer BAPI Programming - Sample Exam Questions ABAP Questions Cross-Applications Components SAP Forms Business Information Warehouse Sapscripts Advanced Planner and Optimizer SmartForms SAP Business Workflow Handling Units Management SAP Functional vs ABAP Document Management System

Training Learning ABAP or SAP Application SAP Jobs Forum for SAP Recruiter and Jobs Seekers SAP Jobs Opportunity SAP Links Links of SAP websites

SAP Data Migration with LSMW Production Planning Process Computer Aided Test Tool Industries Flow Customer Relationship Management Customer User Exit For Billing Explanation Of Purchasing Info Record Re-run Released Cost Estimate For Material Network Scheduling In Project System Documenting HR Rules And Schemas Control Of Expiry Date For Inspection Retro Billing And Self-Billing

Miscellaneous Contents Oracle Database, SQL, Application, Programming Tips Java Programming Hints and Tips Unix System Administration Hints and Tips Linux Administration Hints and Tips

SAP was founded in 1972 in Walldorf, Germany. It stands for Systems, Applications and Products in Data Processing. Over the years, it has grown and evolved to become the world premier provider of client/server business solutions for which it is so well known today. The SAP R/3 enterprise application suite for open client/server systems has established a new standards for providing business information management solutions. SAP product are consider excellent but not perfect. The main problems with software product is that it can never be perfect.

The main advantage of using SAP as your company ERP system is that SAP have a very high level of integration among its individual applications which guarantee consistency of data throughout the system and the company itself. In a standard SAP project system, it is divided into three environments, Development, Quality Assurance and Production. The development system is where most of the implementation work takes place. The quality assurance system is where all the final testing is conducted before moving the transports to the production environment. The production system is where all the daily business activities occur. It is also the client that all the end users use to perform their daily job functions. To all company, the production system should only contains transport that have passed all the tests. SAP is a table drive customization software. It allows businesses to make rapid changes in their business requirements with a common set of programs. User-exits are provided for business to add in additional source code. Tools such as screen variants are provided to let you set fields attributes whether to hide, display and make them mandatory fields. This is what makes ERP system and SAP in particular so flexible. The table driven customization are driving the program functionality instead of those old fashioned hard-coded programs. Therefore, new and changed business requirements can be quickly implemented and tested in the system. Many other business application software have seen this table driven customization advantage and are now changing their application software based on this table customizing concept. In order to minimized your upgrading costs, the standard programs and tables should not be changed as far as possible. The main purpose of using a standard business application software like SAP is to reduced the amount of time and money spend on developing and testing all the programs. Therefore, most companies will try to utilized the available tools provided by SAP. What is Client? What is the difference between Customization and Configuration? The difference between cutomizing and configuration is: - CONFIGURATION: we will configure the system to meet the needs of your

business by using the existing data. - CUSTOMIZING: we will customise or adapt the system to your business requirements, which is the process of mapping SAP to your business process. - CLIENT: A client is a unique one in organizational structure, can have one or more company codes. Each company code is its own legal entity in finance. Configuration vs. Customization When considering enterprise software of any type, it is important to understand the difference between configuration and customization.The crux of the difference is complexity. Configuration uses the inherent flexibility of the enterprise software to add fields, change field names,modify drop-down lists, or add buttons. Configurations are made using powerful built-in tool sets. Customization involves code changes to create functionality that is not available through configuration. Customization can be costly and can complicate future upgrades to the software because the code changes may not easily migrate to the new version.Wherever possible, governments should avoid customization by using configuration to meet their goals.Governments also should understand their vendor's particular terminology with regard to this issue since words like "modifications" or "extensions" often mean different things to different vendors. *-- Sivaprasad, Sonali Sardesai What is SAP R3? We know that SAP R/3 is software, it particular it is client-server software. This means that the groups/layers that make up a R/3 System are designed to run simultaneously across several separate computer systems. When you install Microsoft Excel on your PC, each component of Excel (printing components, graphing components, word processing components, and etc.) is stored, managed, and processed via the hardware of your PC. When a company installs SAP¶s software each component (or "layer´ in R/3¶s case) is stored, managed, and processed via the hardware of separate and specialized computer systems. Each of the various layers is capable of calling upon the specialty of any of the other installed layers in order to complete a given task. Those components/layers that are requesting services are called ³clients´, those components/layers that are providing services are called ³servers´. Thus the term *-- Shailesh Kumar (shailesh_das@yahoo.com) ³client/server´. What is meant by SAP ECC?

SAP is an ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) module, ECC is the version of SAP, like 4.6, 4.6c and 4.7 in that series new version is ECC-6. Its known as Enterprise core component.

What is SAP Landscape?
By: Kunal Landscape is like a server system or like a layout of the servers or some may even call it the architecture of the servers viz. SAP is divided into three different lanscape DEV, QAS and PROD. - DEV would have multiple clients for ex: 190- Sandbox, 100- Golden, 180- Unit Test. - QAS may again have mutiple clients for ex: 300- Integration Test, 700 to 710 Training. - PROD may have something like a 200 Production. These names and numbers are the implementer's discreet on how they want it or they have been using in their previous implementations or how is the client's business scenario. Now whatever you do in the Sandbox doesn't affect the other servers or clients. Whenever you think you are satisfied with your configuration and you think you can use it moving forward, you RE-DO it in the golden client (remember, this is a very neat and clean client and you cannot use it for rough usage). As you re-do everything that you had thought was important and usable, you get a transport request pop up upon saving everytime. You save it under a transport request and give your description to it. Thus the configuration is transported to the Unit Test client (180 in this example). You don't run any transaction or even use the SAP Easy Access screen on the 100 (golden) client. This is a configuration only client. Now upon a successful tranport by the Basis guy, you have all the configuration in the Testing client, just as it is in the Golden client. The configuration remains in sync between these two clients. But in the Testing client you can not even access SPRO (Display IMG) screen. It's a transaction only client where you perform the unit test. Upon a satisfactory unit test, you move the good configuration to the next SERVER (DEV). The incorrect or unsatisfactory configuration is corrected in Golden (may again as well be practised in the sandbox prior to Golden) and accordingly transported back to 180 (Unit Test) until the unit test affected by that particular config is satisfactory.

Where SAP Installed. You are given a sandbox server where you do all the configuration/customization as per the companies business process. to be transported to Production server.Where SAP GUI have. Later it will deploy to client from production server. Presentaion Server. Production Server: This is the last/ most refined client where the user will work after project GO LIVE. Application Server . In testing server tester check/test the program and then transport it to Production Server. 2. Database Server .Where Database installed. Sandbox server: In the initial stages of any implementation project. 1. QUALITY : is where the core team members and other members test the customization. In summary: Landscape : is the arrangement for the servers IDES : is purely for education purpose and is NOT INCLUDED in the landscape. DEVELOPMENT ---> QUALITY ----> PRODUCTION DEVELOPMENT : is where the the consultants do the customization as per the company's requirement. the configuration is done is development server and saved in workbench requests. Developer develop their program in Development server and then transport it to test server. complete and final configuration that is being used in the implementation. 3. Development Server: . They organised their office in these three way. A request will flow from Dev->Qual->Prod and not backwards. What is the meaning of "R" in R/3 systems? . Any changes/ new develpoment is done is development client and the request is transported to production.Once the BBP gets signed off. These three are landscape of any Company.The Golden client remains the 'database' (if you wanna call it that) or you may rather call it the 'ultimate' reference client for all the good. PRODUCTION : is where the live data of the company is recorded.

What is full form IMG and SPRO? How are they different from each other? IMG :. 1) Presentation 2) Application 3) Database Why do we call client 000 as golden client? Golden client contains all the configuration data and master data so some extent. SPRO :. This where you can do all the SAP configuration work. hence the name "Golden Client". What SPRO stands for? SPRO stands for SAP Project Reference Object . this will help in the same way. SPRO is basically used to organize the consultant customizing during the SAP Project Phrase. Type in the T-Code SPRO under That got to Main Menu which is IMG.R/3 stands for realtime three tier architecture. This is the kind of architrecture SAP R/3 system has. As we dont have STOP icon as we have in WINDOWS.Implementation Guide. Then select "stop transaction". . R/3 means three layers are installed in Different system/server and they are connected with each other. SPRO------>IMG. It is also known as the Configuration Menu. Right click on the end button (X) on the top right corner of the window. How to close a window? If we want to stop a transaction in the middle. All the configuration settings are done in golden clients and then moved to other clients. Hence this client acts as a master record for all transaction settings. It is used to configure the setting as per your client requirement by using the standard setting present in the system.SAP Project Reference Object.

After the user chooses ENTER. After the user chooses ENTER . the system automatically fills in default value. If a field is indicated. but will help a lot. .Command Field Why do you create user-specific parameters? They supply defaults to R/3 fields. What is a data dictionary or repository? Central catalog that contains the descriptions of an organization's data and provides information about the relationships between the data and its use in programs and screens. These message types have the following effects during list processing: A (=Abend): The system displays a message of this message type in a dialog window. (Concept of PARAMETER ID) Name the three different kinds of messages in the R/3 system.Dynamic Menu . While creating a secondary list. the system terminates the report. the system resumes processing at the current program position. I (=Information): The system displays a message of this message type in a dialog window. the system terminates the corresponding processing block and keeps displaying the previous list level. E (=Error) or W (=Warning): The system displays a message of this message type in the status line. After the user confirms the message using ENTER. Tips by : Bhaskar Name two ways to start a transaction. the system acts as follows: While creating the basic list. the entry can also be replaced with a value entered by the user. Depending on the field definition.Its a very small tip. the system terminates the entire transaction (for example SE38). What is the difference between them? A message can have five different types. . S (=Success): The system displays a message of this message type on the output screen in the status line of the currently created list.

The ABAP/4 Dictionary stores system-wide data definitions. data that describes other data. Then mark activity.Transportation 6. The system then displays a list of records matching the specifications.g. how could you do that? User maintenance transactions allow the system administrator to create and maintain user master records. VS00 . Execute.Sales Support 3. When you create a new data definition. Paste IMG Activity and run. What is a matchcode? Comparsion key.Billing . Go to T. This includes the generation and assignment of authorizations and authorization profiles. Tips by : Rohan SAP SD Transaction codes List I found a way to know hidden customizing Tcodes. VF00 . Before executing customizing task you desire. A matchcode allows you to locate the key of a particular database record (e. If you want an end user to see a specific menu after logging on the R/3 system. You will see Tcode that belongs to IMG Activity. VT00 .Master data 2. VL00 . the Dictionary tool does all the processing necessary to create the definition. VA00 .e. point it and go to Edit-Display IMG Activity.Code se16 and type in CUS_IMGACH table. account number) by entering any field value contained in the record.Shipping 5.Sales 4. SAP SD Tips by: Javier The most frequently used transaction codes are as follows: 1. VC00 . You can use the Dictionary tool to look up the "definition" of objects in your R/3 System. i..The data descriptions in a Data Dictionary is also called metadata.

Modify Customer XD03 .Collective processing of delivery 7. OVAU . V/08 .Pricing 9.Contract change .Pricing proc determination 11. V/06 .Change Inquiry VA13 .Others as follows: At Configuration: 1. OVAZ . VA11 . OVAL .Customer Account Changes VD06 .Access sequence Enduser: 1.Define delivery types 8.Define Sales documents type (header) 2.To create material determination condition record 4.Scheduling agreement change · VA42 .Create Inquiry VA12 .Change Customer VD03 . VOV6 .Create Customer XD02 .Display Inquiry Sales & Distribution Sales order / Quote / Sched Agreement / Contract · VA01 .Assign Item categoreies(Item cat determination) 5.Maintain pricing procedure 10.Display Customer 2. Customer Master Creation-VD01 and XD01 (for full inclu company code) VD02 .Create outbound delivery with ref sales order 6. OVLK . Create Other material ----MM00 3.V/07 .Assigning Sales area to sales documents type 3.Change Order · VA03 .Display Order · VA02 . VL01 . VOV4 .Flag for Deletion Customer XD01 . VOV8 .To assign blocks to relevant sales documents type 7.Create Order · VA02 .Display Customer VD04 .OVKP .Material availability Overview 5.Order reasons 4. CO09.List of sales orders · VA32 . VL04 .Scedule line categories 6.Sales order change · VA05 . VB11.

List of sales documents · VKM1 .ASSIGN COUNTRY TO TAX PROC OVK3 --.ACCESS OBQ3 --.ASSIGN DELIVERY PLANTS and thenVK11 to maintain the condition record for the tax rate.Change Quotation · VA23 .List of deliveries · VL06G .Change billing document · VF11 .CUSTOMER TAX CATEGORY OVK4 --.TAX PROCEDURE CAL OBBG --.Cancel Billing document · VF04 .CONDITION TABLE OBQ2 --.Delivery due list · VKM5 .Change delivery document · VL04 .Display Customer invoices by line · FBL1N .Material Determination Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 How to configure tax? Use the following Tcodes: OBQ1 --.Billing due list · FBL5N .Cancel goods issue · VT02N .Display Vendor invoices by line Delivery · VL02N .List of outbound deliveries for goods issue · VL06P . .List of blocked SD documents · VD52 . VKM4 .Create Quotation · VA22 .List of outbound deliveries for picking · VL09 .TAX DETERMINATION RULES OVK6 --.· VA21 .MATERIAL TAX CATEGORY OVK1 --.Output for shipments General · VKM3.Display Quotation Billing · VF02 .Change shipment · VT70 .

change/block vendor master data XK02/XK05 8. Define tolerance Group for vendor OBA3 5. range for vendor account group XKN1 3.Vandna How to find the strategy group in sap sd? Menu path for Strategy Group is: Spro --> Production --> Production Planning --> Demand Management --> Planned Independent Requirements --> Planning Strategy --> Define Strategy Group.Strategy Group. creditors A/c 6. . OPPT -. Create Vendor master data XK01 7.I raise a sales order and is getting a error stating that "sales area is not defined".Combine your Sales Organisations. Define document type and no. 1) At SPRO-->SD-->Sales header-->Assign Sales area to Sales document . Create a vendor account group OBD3 2.MRP 3 .Planning -. Distribution Channels & Divisons 2) At VOPA-->Assign Partner Determination procedure to your Account Group of Customer Master you are using. range OBA7 a) KA b) KG c) KR d) KZ *-.Maintain Starategy Group We can see Strategy Group in Material Master Record . Create 2 GL accounts FS00 a) Purchases A/c b) S. 3) At VOPA--> Assign Partner Functions to your Account Group & Partner Determination procedure Steps to create a Vendor Master Data at the client level and how do we extend it to different company codes? Follow the following steps: 1. Define no. Assign number range to Vendor account group OBAS 4.

Goto -.but customer want before one month closing the period system should alert with popup box like this contract is going to close. Item category usage controls. Item category usage can also be maintained via the item categories In contracts we are creating quantity contract and value contracts in that we only put the validity period after validity period that contract will close. Number Rage are use to define what number to be assign to sales document type. Instead of this the Std system has a reminder system where in the open Contracts and Quotaions are popped up when you about to create a sales order. For this you need to do some programming.For Make to Order 20 . Number range can be assign Internal or external. for example. This setting is in the Sales order header . for this sales manager can follow up the customer for renual the contract.Quotation and Outline agreement messages If you want to have different number range for different sales area where the settings to be done. the system response if during document processing an item does not refer to a material but to a text item.10 . In External number range user manually assign number to sales document.For Make to Stock Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 Where do we maintain "Item Category Usage" at the master level? Spro --> Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Documents --> Sales Document Item --> Define Item Category Usage Item Category Usage: item category usages which control the usage of an item. Getting a pop-up when the Contract is going to expire is not a Standard SAP thing. In internal number range system automatically assign a number to sales document according to number range define in system. For Assigning Number Range use T-Code VN01 .VOV8 --.

Prepare a sales tax register J1I3 .Create outgoing excise invoices in batches J1I5 .VC/2 Display Customer Hierarchy . reverse.Assign excise invoices to a delivery for sales from depots J1INJV . or recredit a subcontracting challan J1IFQ .Update the RG 1 and Part I registers J1IEX .Change a subcontracting challan J1IF12 .VDH2 .Post an incoming excise invoice (excise supervisor) J1IF01 .Create additional excise entry at depot J2I5 .Adjust withholding tax Item J1INREP .Extract data for excise registers J2I6 .Verify and post an incoming excise invoice J1IX .Year-End Income Tax Depreciation Report J1IR .List subcontracting challans J1IH .Excise invoice entry at depot J1IGA .Download register data J1IS .SAP SD TCodes For India Transaction Action: J1I2 .Display a subcontracting challan J1IF13 .Make a CENVAT adjustment posting J1IIN .Complete.Print excise registers Standard SAP SD Reports Reports in Sales and Distribution modules (LIS-SIS): Sales summary .Reconcile quantities for subcontracting challans J1IFR .Capture an incoming excise invoice (excise clerk) J1IEX_P .Reprint a withholding tax certificate for a vendor J1IQ .Process exemption forms J1IW .Transfer excise duty to CENVAT account J2IU .Incoming Excise Invoices (central transaction) J1IEX_C .Process an excise invoice (outgoing) for other movements J1IU .Create an incoming excise invoice (without reference to purchase order) J2I8 .Create an outgoing excise invoice J1IJ .Create a subcontracting challana J1IF11 .Remit excise duty fortnightly J2I9 .Monthly CENVAT return J1IG .

VA15 Quotation List .MC(B Sales org analysis-Incoming orders .VF04 Incomplete Billing documents .MC-A Shipping point Analysis .MC+2 Material Analysis-Incoming orders .MC+M Material Analysis.Returns .Invoiced Sales .MCTE Sales org analysis-Invoiced sales .MC+E Customer Analysis.MCTA Material Analysis(SIS) .VL06f Material Returns-Analysis .Invoiced Sales .V.VL22 Find the list of SAP Transaction codes .MC+I Deliveries-Due list .MC(U Shipping point Analysis-Returns .MCTC Sales org analysis .Cr.14 Order Within time period .SD01 Duplicate Sales orders in period .VA25 Incomplete Sales orders .V_NL List customer material info .V_UC Customer Returns-Analysis .List of Outbound deliveries .MC+Y Sales office Analysis.MC-O Blocked orders .Display Condition record report .MC(E General.V.VL04 Billing due list .MC-E Sales office Analysis.MC+A Customer Analysis.VA05 List of Billing documents .MC(I Sales org analysis-Returns .VD59 List of sales order .15 Outbound Delivery Monitor . Memo .VF05 Inquiries list .MCV9 Customer Analysis-Basic List .Sales .V/LD Create Net Price List .V/I6 Pricing Report .V.SDD1 Display Delivery Changes .MC+Q Variant configuration Analysis .VL06o Incomplete delivery .02 Backorders .

ABAP Dictionary: Fill in the Database table name and click the Display button. click in Top Menu . Assuming you know that most Materials Management transaction codes start with MM. I heard that there is some table which contains all the transaction codes with their descriptions.Table contents Display If you want to display all the transaction code (total . or Goto transaction SE93 There are two ways where you can find the list of transaction codes in SE93.Where I can find the list of transaction codes and their usage. Once you entered the screen. . or Simply goto transaction SM01. Does anyone know about the Table that consist all the T-Code? Listed here are the various ways you can find the list of transaction codes and their usage: Use transaction SE11 .TSTCT table will contain all the Tcodes with Texts.TSTC table will contain all the Tcodes and . . Method 1: You must be familiar with the starting characters strings for each of the R/3 application modules. In the Fields: Transaction code.Utilities . type in MM* and press the function key F4 The list of transaction code starting with MM will be displayed.57. although this tcode is to Lock/Unlock any transaction code. you can also view all the tcode available in the R/3 system from here.048) you have to change the Fields: Maximum number of hits to 99999 (default 500).

> select change. Do not delete any entries using &SAP_EDIT. type ³&SAP_EDIT´. It will activate SAP editing function.. This is helpful only in case of SAP Menu not in case of SPRO . the Tcode and it will give the nodes and menu path. --You can edit through debugging. I know a particular T Code and can enter and work on it. go to transaction SE16N. make sure you remembered to change the Fields: Maximum no.. --Go to table and press Ctrl+ shift + F10 where you will go to table entries. There you edit and save the entries. --You cannot edit entries in SE11 unless it contains a Table maintenance generator. So just build a Table maintenance generator.ie IMG.. If want to display all the tcodes.Execute and the first 500 transaction will be display. And then select the entries that you want to edit by selecting the checkbox and goto menu Table entry . Add Edit Delete Entry In SE11 Database Table How to edit entries of table in se11 ? To update the data of any table. . How do I know what is the menu path for that T Code? Enter Search_SAP_Menu in the command box and when the pop box appears enter... Click on F8 (execute).it is not recommended.. click Utilities . of hits right at the bottom of the screen.Find .Method 2: On the Top Menu.

or there is some other way to view? By: Riki Paramita .How to delete a record in SE16 ? To delete the records from particular table its easy.Give the table name . Note: After displaying the contents of the list.Now select the record which has to be deleted . How can I insert new data in the table? Give the transaction code as se11 In that give the table name and press display Then in that field name above there is delivery and maintenance click the same and change it as display maintenance allowed Transaction Code To View All SAP Tables What is the transaction code to view all SAP (PP) table.Instead change it to edit and then save the changes then it will take you to the screen where you can edit that records & also delete that particular records. .Select that and switch 'on' the Debugging mode press enter .Then data (list) screen will be displayed.Then press F6 goes to subroutine where there is field called display . Switch ON the Debug Mode the select the particular record then click display then it will take u to Debug Screen when there is a program for sy-ucomm then click F7 Button and then Change Code = EDIT then save the code the afterwards it will take u to edit mode of that particular record.Execute the table with the selection fields . Goto : se11 .

For e.BOM Positions (detail) MAPL .g. First. then select the sub-component (ex : PP-SFC. go to SE16.To browse tables which specified for PP module only. look at the bottom of the screen: Then select components by clicking the + sign to open up the sub-compenent you want. browse the application component (ex : PP).Routing Group Header PLSO . and all tables within the specified area will be displayed.Assignment for Task Lists to Materials PLKO . click the Down Arrow next to the Table Name field: Then it will pop-up a screen.Material BOM STKO . you can use SE16 with a specified application component & sub-component.Routing Group Sequence PLPO .BOM Header STPO .Routing Group Operations . In tcode SE16. for Production Orders related tables).: Some important tables within the PP area : MAST .

General Material Data MARC .Header Data Sales Document .Production Order Header AFPO -Production Order Position (details) Related tables in MM area : MAKT .AFKO . order probability) Customer Master Tax Indicator Partner Function key Output type Customer Master Ship Data Customer/Vendor Link VBAK + VBUK Header Status and Administrative Data Sales Document .Item Data Partners Document Flow Sales Document Schedule Line Sales Requirements: Individual Records Delivery Document item data. includes referencing PO Delivery Document Header data Billing Document Header Billing Document Item Shipping Unit Item (Content) Shipping Unit Header SD Delivery DocumeLIPS LIKP Billing Document SD Shipping Unit VBRK VBRP VEKP VEPO .Material Descriptions MARA . Code Data (payment method.Material to BOM Link Important Tables for SAP SD Sales and Distribution: Table Customers KNA1 KNB1 reconciliation acct) KNB4 KNB5 KNBK KNKA KNKK limits) KNVV KNVI KNVP KNVD KNVS KLPA Sales Documents VBAKUK VBUK VBAK VBKD VBUP VBAP VBPA VBFA VBEP VBBE Description General Data Customer Master ± Co. Customer Customer Customer Customer Customer Payment History Master ± Dunning info Master Bank Data Master Credit Mgmt.Business Data Item Status Sales Document .Plant Data for Material MARD .Storage Location Data for Material MAST . Master Credit Control Area Data (credit Sales Area Data (terms.

Certification. Certificate of Attendance from the various SAP courses attended.SD Tcodes y y y SAP SD Transaction codes List Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 Get help for your SAP SD problems SAP SD Forums . A statement from the Project Manager on Letter Head indicating participant's experience or training.sap. For example: HR400 .com/trainingcatalog -> type in tacert . cancellation (i. Proof can be given in the following ways: 1.e amendment to dates) is not permitted Here is a link to check dates of certification: http://www. It needs to be the classes that SAP Ltd.Certification enrolment must accompany payment (credit card details preferred) before registration will be processed . Interview Questions and Configuration mySAP Certification .Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP Sales and Distribution Books SAP SD Books . Terms: .Criteria For Application The guidelines: Criteria to applying for a SAP Certification without Prerequisites: "All candidates registering for the mySAP Certification Test must ensure that they have at least 2 years SAP implementation experience or have attended at least 15 days of relevant training in SAP. arrange and accept.Once payment is received and confirmation provided.Payroll Configuration. A resume. 2." Proof of the above must be presented upon registration.Candidates must meet criteria mentioned . 3.

com/asia/education/ Quick course search: http://www.com/certification .Select your relevant certification area To register: http://www.com/trainingcatalog Delivery Logistics Execution SAP Certification Exam My SAP SD Certification Experience Sample Questions and Answers SAP SD Exam SAP SD Questions and Answers SD Questions on Corporate Structure Short SAP SD Questions 1 Short SAP SD Questions 2 Short SAP SD Questions 3 Interview Questions Important Tips for Interview for SAP SD SAP SD Interview Questions Interview Question and Answers on SAP SD Some SAP SD Interview Questions 1 Some SAP SD Interview Questions 2 Tables/Tcodes in SAP SD Important Tables for SAP SD SAP SD Transaction codes List SAP Sales and Distribution Book Implementing SAP ERP Sales & Distribution Highly Recommended for those who want to become a SAP SD Expert. Answers.sap.com/asia/education/ .Click on "SAP Consultant Certification" . and Explanations Retail Information Systems Based on SAP Products SAP SD Premium Paper SAP Sales Order Processing Overview A Step by Step Guide to the .sap. Provides details SD Implementation and Configuration from Basic to Expert level.sap.Select Registration . SAP SD Interview Questions.To find out more about certification test types offered: http://service.Schedule of test only To check out SAP Educational terms and conditions: http://www.sap.

. to SO Consignment Sales Process in SAP Issue free goods to selected Customers Supressing Fields in Sale Order Some Light on Batch Determination Diff. Change and Assignment Sales Order How To Create Sales Order Duplicate customer purchase order Default First Date is not Today Sales Order Confirm Quantity Date Auto proposed all the dates when creating Sales Order Define Material used at which Sales and Distri.more SAP SD Books Free SD Download (PDF) Download: Plain Variant Configuration Download: Sales Process Flow Chart HUM Basic Process of how Packing Works The "Packing Process" with an Example Pricing Difference between Condition Type Accumulate the amt of cond. between Item Proposal and Material Determination Steps for SD Variant Configuration Number Ranges In Sales Order What is Debit note and Credit note Explain What Is Credit and Debit Memo Configure Intercompany Stock Transport Order Inter Company Sales Process SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations . date. MM & FI Why Do We Assign Division to Sales Organisation How To Do Master Record Mass Maintenance Serial Number Management In SAP SD Sales Office Address. Process Assign a Cost Center manually in a SO (VBAKKOSTL) Transfer of Requirements What Do You Mean By Transfer of requirements Define Tax Determination Rules Taxation Explain with an example SAP SD: Scheduling Agreement Vs Contract Sales Order Mass Change Release strategy for Sales order How to do rebate processing Rebate Process with Ref. Sales Ord. Billing Report to Check the Entered Pricing Condition Price Mass Update of condition pricing Material Master Price as Sales Price Automatically Customer discounts on effort only Steps to Create Commission for Agent SD Questions About Pricing Condition Add a Field To New Condition Table in Pricing Header Condition and Group Condition Steps Involved In Condition Technique Sales Order Freight Condition In Header Condition How To Use Condition Exclusion Type In SO Pricing Report & Condition Index What Is Condition Base Value .. types in accting document Hiding Price Condition Types on a Sales Document Creating New Pricing Procedure What is alt cal type & alt base value & Req field in Pricing Re-pricing in a Quotation Quantity Based Discounts in Bulk Quantities Sales Determine sales price with shipping point Pricing date based on Deliv.Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 SAP SD TCodes For India Standard SAP SD Reports SD Frequently Asked Question Sales and Distribution FAQ Link Between SAP SD.

Exclusion will be determined in the billing doc. F5 727 Prepaid process possible Restricting Number Of Items In Billing Doc Document Not Relevant For Billing Procedure To Cancel Billing Documents Schedule VF04 For Individual Billing Run Explain The Concept of Resource Related Billing Cancelled Billing Document Has No Accounting Document Retro Billing And Self-Billing Exchange Rate Billing Documents Credit Management How To Do Configuration For Credit Availability Check Management Availability Check on Quotation SD material Determination based on availability MRP block for Credit limit attained Customers check Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking Creating Multiple Materials in Material Sales value field not getting updated after Determination creating billing Backward and Forward Scheduling Diff Between Simple and Automatic Credit Configuring Availability Check Through Check Types Checking Groups Back Order Processing Using CO06 and V_V2 Set Up for Credit Card Payment Processing Dunning Process In Credit Management See The Scope of ATP Check What Is Credit Exposure Account Payable . KOMG Billing Billing cannot be Release to Accounting Default Start Variant for VF04 Cond.Normal Sales Order Cycle Configuration Default Storage Location In Sales Order Explain The Meaning Of An Open Sales Order Sold To Party In Sales Order Screen Profit Center Default In Sales Order Check Whether The Entries Is Maintain in LIS Update or Not 3PL Purchase Order Link To Sales Order What is the Foreign trade data required in SO for doing Exports Material To Be Added or Excluded To a Customer Sales Order Number Blank In MD04 Partner Functions Partner Determination For Sales Doc Setup Partner Determination Procedure Sales and Distribution BOM Sales BOM Implementation How to Know that Sales BOM is working or not? What Is BOM Referring to SAP SD Pricing Customization For Sales BOM Third Party Sales Process Flow for 3rd Party Sales Cross Selling : How To Configure An Example Of Third Party Sales Sales Information System Difference/Similarities between LIS and SIS Rounding Off Condition Not Appearing In Sales Order How To Create Field in KOMP. Steps creating new or changing existing Billing Doc Typ Billing Block will not worked if you did not assign it Billing Plan for Milestone Billing Billing Plan Function and Processing Combine Billing for deliveries with different date Billing Spilt by Item Category Max. of items in FI reached Msg no. No.

Best regards. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. SAP Basis.Settlement Downpayment with Installment payment Term Customized SD ABAP Reports Upload Condition Pricing Sales Order Changed History Display User Exits on Sales and Distribution Customer User Exit For Billing CIN SAP SD CIN Configuration Customer Return material From customer Customer Returns and Replacement Orders Customer Wants To Take The Order Back Usage Of Customer Pricing Group Hierarchy Customizing Customer Hierarchy in SD Basic SD Questions On Product Hierarchies How To Configure Product Hierarchy Product Allocation Implement the Product Allocation Functionality Output/Email Sending a billing document by e-mail Customizing picking output Program for Sales Order by Customer. tabstrips Parameters.com Set the default start variant for VL10 In transaction SU01. Assuming you have created a variant TEST . First you define the number range for deliveries in 'VN01'. Date. Sales How To Maintain Output Types in SD Printing Block For Credit Block SO Set the number range for Deliveries The internal and external number range for delivery are control by the delivery type.sap-img. Then you assign the number range for the delivery type in transaction '0VLK'.

Parameters LE_VL10_USER_VARIANT for Delivery Creation Value TEST Text Default Selection Parameters Best regards. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.V_TPAR_VUV .sap-img. SAP Basis. SAP Basis. This OSS notes will help you in creating the additional fields :198137 . you define whether a warning message should be issued Assign incompletion procedures to partner functions in SM30 .User exits in delivery processing Best regards. here you define the Status Group to used 2.com Adding additional fields to Delivery Due List If you would like to add additional fields to the Delivery Due List Transaction VL04. These fields do not exist in the list of additional fields in the IMG. You will need to have a user exit written. There are 3 levels :Groups Procedures Fields -> 1. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.com Checking Fields with Incompletion procedures for Delivery Define your incomplete procedures in OVA2.VL10: Customer-specific enhancements / user exits 415716 .sap-img.

sap-img. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. the settings only affect those newly created materials starting from the days you set the parameters.V_T001L_D. SAP Basis. or pricing etc. For every field in the procedure you also have to define whether a warning message should be issued during processing if no data is entered in this field. For those materials already created. billing. SAP will not consider the stocks when you do a delivery creation. Best regards.Assign incompletion forms to the delivery types in SM30 . you have to changed it manually one by one or write an .V_TVLK_VUV Assign Incompletion Forms to the Delivery Item Types in SM30 . If you have not entered data in one of the fields in the document. Take note that when you set the parameters in SM30 . the document is incomplete. You used SM30 .com Exclude inventory in Storage Locations during Delivery Creation When you exclude MRP planning for a storage location. If you does not wish to include/exclude the storage location for all the materials.V_TVLP_VUV Define the Status Group in SM30 .V_T001L_D to include/exclude the storage location for MRP. Depending on the status group you can block certain subsequent activities for the document. In an incompletion procedure you group together the fields that are to be checked for completion.V_TVUVS You use this function to block a document for delivery. you can just goto MM02 -> MRP View 4 to include/exclude it for that particular materials only.

Best regards.sap-img.ABAP program to mass changed it automatically. if you want to include zero quantity items but if they are all zero. You make the necessary settings for the ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) system within the WMS component (Warehouse Management System). ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. . Best regards. you do not want to create the delivery then you have to used the user exit USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT_PREPARE. The steps are set up as a checklist and guide you through the process of configuring the system parameters. Set the value to B or C.Decentralized Warehouse Management System Integration Setup You can operate the SAP Warehouse Management System (WMS) as a stand-alone decentralized system that is independent of a central Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) System. SAP Basis.com Avoiding delivery creation when items quantity are zero Deliveries are created collectively using VL10. However.sap-img. SAP Basis. This will prevent delivery with zero lines from being created. Checklist (For those with the Table Views used transaction code SM30).com SAP WMS . ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. In the definition of delivery item category 0VLP. there is a field Check Quantity 0.

The physical warehouse where these activities take place is identified by the warehouse number. (Valid if the component MM-IM (Inventory Management) is implemented.Assign plant/storage location to warehouse number in Views V_T320.Assign WM movement type references to IM movement types V_T3211 .Delivery-Relevant Data for Warehouse Number . Make basic settings for RFC in transaction BD97. section "Basis Components" Maintaining Logical Systems in Views V_TBDLS.) Fields : Plant + Sloc + WhN 2.Activate decentralized WMS in Views V_T340DM.Create storage location in OX09 (if necessary). .Delivery-Relevant Parameters for Reference Movement Type V_T340DL . section "Central processing" -> Application .1.Finally do a consistency check for decentralised WMS in transaction OL20.Exclude stock in decentralized WMS in Views V_T321B (if the decentralized WMS is not an SAP R/3 system) . .Define warehouse number in Views V_T3001.Define interface to Inventory Management in Views :V_156S_WM . 4. like goods movements and physical inventory. Assign logical system to client in Views T000. . (you should not copy the warehouse number in the ERP system) Activities within a warehouse. are assigned to a specific warehouse number. Customizing for "Enterprise Structure" .(if necessary) . Customizing for "Decentralized WMS integration". 3. Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)".

section "Maintain Distribution Model" You can define the Reduce message types and Activate message types in transaction BD53. Display or check distribution model Generate partner profile in transaction BD82. . Customizing for "Decentralized WMS integration". activate decentralized WMS). (you can also perform this activity using ALE Customizing) Distribute distribution model in transaction BD64 (model view) using menu item "Edit" If both the ERP system and the decentralized WMS are SAP R/3 systems. SAP recommends that you use message types : "MATMAS" (material master tables) and "DEBMAS" (customer master) as a template. Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)". the distribution model should be distributed on a central basis only.5. Be aware that only those fields that are absolutely necessary are transferred from the master data tables in the ERP system to the decentralized WMS. section "Maintain Distribution Model" (transaction BD64) Activate the change pointers for master data distribution using transactin BD61. application-specific Customizing parameters are modified or set (for example. when the model is generated. 7. 6. that is. As far as the application is concerned. section "Central processing" -> Distribution Use transaction OL19 to generate distribution model. Customizing for "Application Link Enabling (ALE)". via the ERP system.

If you want to use the picking list according to the "old" procedure. Best regards. SAP Basis."Tools" . ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. the system does no longer display the actions for SD picking in the implementation guide. o Carry out Transaction OVLT to assign the picking list types to the shipping points. reduce the message types concerned with transaction BD53.com Problem in Shipping . you can maintain the list as follows: o Carry out Transaction V/38 to maintain the output types.If necessary.sap-img."Data Transfer : Material Master" -> "Define required-field check for ALE/Direct Input" (Views V_T130S) Define whether an error message should be generated in the receiving system for required fields from the material master. Best regards."Material Master" .5A. Customizing for "Logistics . 8.sap-img.com SAP Customizing Picking Output From Release 4. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www. o Carry out Transaction V/53 to assign the picking lists to own forms and programs.General" . SAP Basis.

Then select the second row (which includes your WL doc type). Put the no Range object as MATBELEG and click on Number Ranges. Here you can put the year as 2004 or any future year. I am facing a problem in Shipping. After selecting click on the change/maintain button.. Sailendra Go to TCode SNRO. and go to change mode of delivery. On determining the Delivering plant. Then click on Change Groups. sometimes there is a problem in Shipping.which one will be assigned for shipping after Delivery created I also had an error log while creating Transfer order LT03 saying Postings not possible for specified date. After finishing the transfer order.I am new to SD. Could you Kindly clarify whether Shipping point is assigned to the Material in Material Master or you can assign the Storage Location.. the system determines the shipping point with the customising that you do in Logistics Execution > Shipping > Basic Shiping Funct > Shipping point and Goods Recieving Point Determination > Assign Shipping points . Also If a Plant has mutliple shipping points.Is there a way to solve this problem in Deliveries? Pritam When creating a Sales Order. Press "post goods Issue" I am facing this problem: "The number range for the transaction/event WL in year 2004 does not exist" How to solve this problem. On this you can maintain the desired number range. When a SO is created and Delivery then we proceed to Transfer order and Post goods issue. Amol. Plant and Shipping point in Delivery. the system first determines the Delivering Plant in the sequence from the following source: 1) Customer-material info record 2) Customer Master 3) Material Master.

When I click the post goods issue."CO-code". Secondly. for assigning a posting period do the following T-Code OB52 . the bottom message says posting period possible for 2006/6 and 2006/7 for company code. I could not proceed with the Post goods issue. See there is may be two kind of problem: Maybe your system installed in back date so check actual movement date. Fast Links: Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution Reference Books Movement Type Posting Error In Delivery After creating the delivery. Hope the above has clarified your querries.: Here you enter the Shipping point to be determined for the combination of: a) Shipping Condition (which is assigned in the customer master or Salesdocument type) b) Loading group (which is assigned in the material master) c) Delivering Plant (which has already been determined) As regards storage location the same is determined in the delivery from the combination 1) Shipping Point 2) Delivering Plant 3) Storage condition. Amol. in T-Code MB1C What actual movement date you used for PG Received into your plant.

Now. You can change shipping point manually in the order. Check for Sales Order .("please check your Company Code is assign to which Varriant T-code OBBP") Customizing => Financial Accounting => Financial Global Setting => Document => Posting Period => Open and Close Posting Period. *-. .Ratnakar While creating material stock. IMG/ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE/ASSIGNMENT/LOG GENERAL/ ASSIGN PLANT TO CO CODE. and Update your Posting Period as you desire. Shipping Conditions and Storage Location Determination Can we configure Shipping conditions at line item level? Shipping conditions is one of the criteria to determine shipping points. Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8). *-. OMSY but still stock is not creating. it is not allowing to make the final invoice. Now you go to /NOMSY and go to position give company code then change the year to 2007 and pd to 03(now March month)and save it.Shambhu I have created the outbound delivery and have done PGI & made factory invoice but when I try to make the final invoice .S ystem is showing the error "Delivery type ZINC cannot be invoiced with billing type F2 ". The system automatically proposes the shipping point at item level. You go to assign plant to company code and there you de-assign and save it. OB52. Shipping point determination-shipping conditions from (Img of S. I have tried all MMPV. I am getting an error " Posting Period003 2007 is not open".doc type or customer master record of sold-to party) +loading group of Material master+ delivering plant of customer material infor record. again you assign your plant to company code and save it. Shipping points is determined for each order item in sales order. and Update your Posting Period as you desire => Open and Close Posting Period.> Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly.

How this error can be removed? What is the reason for such error? Delivery split can occur for the following reasons. Different ship to parties for line items. Delivery Split Because Of Conflicting Header Data By: Robin Item 000020 . Different delivery dates for line items. the delivering plant.You will have as many shipping points for as shipping conditions. 2.RETA and MARE: These rules are mainly used in trade scenarios. and the storage condition for the material as defined in the material master. If it is not assigned it is proposed from master record of sold-to-party. Customizing : Shipping point determination-IMG-Logistic execution-shipping-basic shipping *-.If storage location for picking is not specified in the order item. The following rules are shipped in the standard system: .In r/3 shipping conditions are assigned to Sales document type.The system determines the picking location based on a rule defined in the delivery type. How system determines storage location in sd? . Otherwise. . . The following data may cause to split as two deliveries: . Check whether the above data are same for all the line items. the storage location entered in the order item is used in the outbound delivery. Different routes for line items. the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item.Delivery split because of conflicting header data (TRAGR 0001<>0002). 1. 3.MALA: The picking location is determined based on the shipping point.you have to define all shipping conditions and assign Shipping points for each shipping conditions.Vrajesh function. In your case.

How to still create a single delivery document? Item 000020: delivery split due to conflicting header data (KDGRP: Z1 <-> Z2) Message no. check in the item data the schedule lines.--> Check the shipping points of the two items it may be different. Go to Material Master. Your problem will be solved.then single delivery will happen. --> Check the shipping conditions are different for the two items. select Sales: General/Plant view and compare for both the materials what is maintained in "Trans. Maintain unique value and then retry. assuming that stock is available for both the materials. --> Check the item level partner functions in the Sales order is there different ship to parties available for the two items. And make the customer group (VBKD KDGRP ) same for line items 10 & 20 .Grp". Delivery split happens because of the customer group also. so as you want to do single delivery. the delivery dates of the line items 10&20 and make sure that both are being delivered on same date. --> Check the loading group of the two items. This is not the business requirement. --> Check the Delivering plant of the items. for both the line items Please check the below: DELIVERY SPLIT: Delivery Split depends on the following criteria: 1) Ship to party 2) Delivery date 3) Plant 4) Shipping point 5) Shipping conditions 6) Transportation group 7) Loading group 8) Item categories of materials . VL033 Diagnosis Item 000020 cannot be shipped in the same delivery with the other items in the document because the header data (KDGRP) is different. but in the delivery checked for concatenation it has the value Z1. It should be different. The KDGRP item field has the value Z2. Getting a delivery split based on different customer group at header level.

packing and transit. 3. loading. 2. Departure zone or country of the delivering plant. this means on this date goods will reach customer after completing the transportation planning. Partial Delivery option will be set in customer master record sales area ----> shipping-> partial deliveries. 4. By: Kevin Route is determined automatically in the sales order based on: 1. Step: 2 .Delivery split happen when the requested quantity by customer is not full met. Follow this:Step: 1 . then in system on 25 Feb we create delivery document with PGI. 5. Destination zone or country of the Ship to Party. here you can create delivery only on 25 feb not before this due date.e on 14 feb 2008 and 25 feb 2008 If the first delivery (14 feb 2008) is created and PGI is done this means on this delivery date customer has received the goods. Road or Train) and Assign Mode of Transport (Mdtr) and Assign Shipping type Procedure group. picking.Define Shipping Types Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Shipping Types Select New Entries and Assign the Shipping Type (e. Shipping condition from the customer master.Define Modes of Transport Path: Spro²Logistics Execution²Transportation²Basic Transportation Function--Routes²Define Routes²Define Modes of Transport. . Example : A sales order is confirmed with 2 schedule lines i. Weight Group. then the system proposes different delivery dates or schedule lines dates based on material availability.g. Transportation group from the material master. For the second delivery date ( 25 feb 2008). Route Determination In Sales Order Explain the basic concept of route process in Sales Order.

Go to Customer master data.Define Routes and Stages. Path: Under the Same Menu path--. Select the Shipping point and enter the Country and Transportation Zone Step: 8 . Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Transportation Groups Step: 9 . The country & Transportation Zone of the ship to party (in CMR) Route can be manually overwritten during a sales order processing.Maintain Route Determination Path: Under the Same Menu path--Maintain Route Determination. Shipping Conditions agreed in the sales document type or with the sold to party + c.Define Transportation Connection Point. Enter the Transportation Zone id. . and save You will get the route. ROUTE DETERMINATION Step: 6 . Step: 7 . The system takes into account the following 4 conditions for determining the Route ± a. Path: Under the Same Menu path--.Step: 3 . In Address of General data.Define Transportation Zone Path: Spro²Logistics Execution²Transportation²Basic Transportation Function--Routes²Route Determination²Define Transportation Zone. The country and the Departure Zone of the shipping point + b. Step: 4 . Select the New Entries and Enter the Details Then Select the Routes stages and define Step: 5 .Define Transportation Connection Point Path: Under the Same Menu path--.Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point.Maintain Stages for all Routes.Define Routes and Stages.Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point. Path: Under the Same Menu path---Maintain Stages for all Routes. You can redetermine the route in the outbound delivery based on weight (weight group) provided it is allowed in the configuration of the delivery type. Transportation Group assigned to the material + d.Define Transportation Groups.

The loading time and pick/pack time come from the shipping point whereas the transit time and transportation lead time come from the route. You enter them in the purchase order. 2) A delivery costs that are not planned in a purchase order and are not entered in the system until the invoice is received. Loading Time + c. A delivery type can be customized to carry out rescheduling if required during the delivery processing Planned Delivery Cost and Unplanned Delivery Cost ERP SAP ==> SD SAP ==> LE SAP What is planned delivery cost and unplanned delivery cost? By: Chung 1) A delivery costs that are planned in a purchase order and are entered in the system (invoice). Planned delivery costs can be differentiated as follows: Origin of Costs i) Freight charges ii) Customs charges Calculation of Costs i) Fixed amount. or a customs office before the purchase order is created. irrespective of delivered quantity . Pick/Pack Time + d. a carrier. the system automatically carries out forward scheduling and will propose a future date. If the material availability date or the transportation planning date falls before the order date.Scheduling takes into account the following times ± a. Planned delivery costs: Planned delivery costs are agreed upon with the vendor. The system performs backward scheduling first to confirm the required quantity checking the material availability on the material availability date. Transit Time + b. Transportation Lead/Planning Time.

) . Therefore. The shipping condition is proposed from the sales document type if a shipping condition has been assigned to it. If not. Shipping conditions are maintained for which partner function in customer master? Shipping condition is maintain in Ship to Party partner function ( sales area data tab -. You can post unplanned delivery costs as follows: . The system posts unplanned delivery costs to a separate G/L account. the shipping condition is proposed from the master record of the sold-to party.shipping.ii) Quantity-dependent amount iii) Percentage of value of the goods Unplanned Delivery Costs: Unplanned delivery costs were not agreed on in the purchase order and are not entered until the invoice is received. You can enter the unplanned delivery costs in the invoice document alongside the costs incurred. the unplanned delivery costs do not debit stock accounts or account assignment objects.Distribute them prorated to calculated invoice items .Post them to separate G/L accounts The system distributes the unplanned delivery costs automatically in the ratio of the value invoiced so far to the values in the current invoice. Shipping Condition Route Determination And Loading Group SAP Functional Modules ==> Logistics Execution Where is the "Shipping Condition" maintained in a customer master? Shipping condition is maintained in the shipping tab under sales area data of customer master.

Shipping condition and Loading group plays a vital part for shipping point determination . Batch Determination In Delivery . Does the system takes the shipping condition twice in search of the route? When the system search for the route it will search through route determination like this: Shipping point*(*Sales order)** and Departure Zone **(From the order shipping point*)*+Shipping condition*(*Customer master which you enter in the order*) *+Transportation Group*(*from material master which you entered in the order**)+destination zone*(*transportation zone of the Customer in the order**)->Route System will determine the shipping point in the sales order based on these selection Shipping conditions+Loading group+Plant-->Shipping point. After determining the shipping point then only the system will start to search route. The combination of shipping condition (Master data of customer /Vendor) + Loading group (material master) + Plant. determines the shipping point. If a value exists in the sales document type (eg. OR) then it will have priority and will replace the value defaulted from CMR. Shipping point will be determined only if it is assigned to the plant from the config. But system will not search the shipping point while searching the route. check the Delivering Plant in Customer master record in XD02 & check the shipping point assignment in OVXC.Shipping conditions will be defaulted from the CMR of SP. So shipping conditions will not consider two times while searching the route. What is the significance of the shipping condition and loading group? Both the shipping condition and loading group are useful in Stock transport order. For the Customer assigned to the receiving Plant.

LOBM_VERAB availability date . But I have one issue in that. I have created customer specific strategy/condition record.LOBM_BWTAR valuation type .LOBM_ZUSTD status .LOBM_LVORM deletion flag . These are: . shelf life .LOBM_LFDAT required delivery date .LOBM_KRT required waiting days for batch . So for each customer I have to maintain the days in characteristic (Which characteristics can be used?) There is std Self life expiration date char is exist in the system you have to activate that.LOBM_LGORT storage location .LOBM_VFDAT expiration date.I have configured the batch determination in delivery and it is working fine.LOBM_MENGE quantity . This concerns all characteristics starting with LOBM_*. LOBM_VFDAT (tcode is BMSM) This function updates the standard characteristics in the classification system reserved for batch management so that they meet the requirements of any new functions.LOBM_MBDAT material availability date .LOBM_QNDAT next batch check date . The days of remaining self life is based on the customer. For customer A it should be 30 and for B 45 etc. Requirement is that during batch determination in delivery system should only pick the batch for which remaining self life is at least 45 days.LOBM_RLZ required remaining shelf life of batch .

List Of User Exit Related to VL01N I need to some restriction in fields ( Actual GI Date.In every client after a release upgrade When the report for updating the standard characteristics has been completed.After defining object dependencies for standard characteristic LOBM_RLZ . remaining life LOBM_RLZ.LOBM_UDCODE usage decision .User Exit for Staging Area Determination (Item) .Calculation of Stock for POs for Shipping Due Date List .: Selection w.LOBM_QSCORE quality score from usage decision You need to execute this function in the following cases: . How do you find out whcih user exits belongs to VL01n ? Here is the list of user exit related to VL01N : V02V0001 V02V0002 V02V0003 V02V0004 V50PSTAT V50Q0001 V50R0001 V50R0002 V50R0004 V50S0001 V53C0001 .Collective processing for delivery creation .Sales area determination for stock transport order .LOBM_RLZ_PROZ required remaining shelf life as a percentage .User Exits for Delivery Processing . after copying other clients .User exit for gate + matl staging area determination .Rough workload calculation in time per item .Delivery Monitor: User Exits for Filling Display Fields . Update Standard Characteristics in BMSM and also Refer SAPNote 33396 .User exit for storage location determination . T-Code:Vl01n ).LOBM_BPRIO stock determination: priority . for this..Collective processing for delivery creation .In newly created clients.Batch determ.Delivery: Item Status Calculation . you receive a log in which all the activities performed are listed.

Choose Enter.Sold-to party or ship-to party If you only enter a ship-to party. you can choose the right sales area in the following dialog box. Inbound) How To Create Sales Order What are the steps to create a sales order? To create a standard sales order.W&S: RWE enhancement . Inbound) . the organizational data. If there are several sales areas for that particular sold-to or ship-to party.Inbound IDoc . Enter the following data: . The values for sales organization. division) are derived from the sold-to or ship-to parties. for distribution channel and the division are usually proposed from user-defined parameters. The sales areas (sales organization. distribution channel. This means that you do not have to enter the sales area when you create a sales document.V53C0002 V53W0001 VMDE0001 VMDE0002 VMDE0003 VMDE0004 . proceed as follows: In the initial screen. a dialog box appears where you can choose the one you require. the sales area. .Sales. if necessary.Shipping Interface: Message SDPACK (Packing. Choose Order Create (VA01). If there are several sold-to parties or sales areas for one ship-to party. the system uses the sold-to or ship-to parties. The system then copies the selected sales area into the entry screen. Entries for the sales office and the sales group are optional. choose Logistics . Enter the order type and.Sales and distribution .Shipping Interface: Message PICKSD (Picking. to derive the sales area. Outbound) .User exits for creating picking waves . If you do not specify a sales area in the initial screen. the system uses this to determine the sold-to party and if necessary.shipping material type/time slot .Shipping Interface: Error Handling . which you entered in the overview screen.Shipping Interface: Message SDPICK (Picking.

Choose Enter.An error message appears in the status bar to inform you if the system is not able to determine a sold-to party. choose the corresponding menu entry.Customer purchase order number . it displays a screen on which you can choose between several delivery proposals. for example. If the system carries out an availability check and finds that there is insufficient stock for an order item to be delivered on the requested date. Save your document. Duplicate customer purchase order If you are facing a problem with duplicate customer purchase order as your company does not allowed a same customer purchase order with the same sales order type. If you enter a sold-to party that is also a unique ship-to party. As soon as you have selected this data. the system displays the alternatives in a dialog box. you defined several unloading points or several ship-to parties in the customer master record of the sold-to party.Payer . If you want to enter further data for the header or items. The system can display alternatives for any or all of the following data: ± .Ship-to party . You can find more information about this in Reactions to the Availability Check in Sales Documents. Enter all necessary data. If you want to change data for the items. the system automatically copies it as such and informs you in the status bar. . . select the items before you choose a menu entry.Material numbers .Order quantities for the materials . the material data that you have entered is displayed. If.Bill-to party Select the valid data from these proposals by positioning the cursor on the line and choosing Choose.Unloading point . You can activated the check for duplicate purchase order with "VOV8".

default First Date wasn't today. Sales Order Confirm Quantity Date .OR .Standard Order. This should be blank if you want the system to propose current day for delivery date. Usually. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff http://www.Returns etc. Nobody change system configuration. The date is control by each Sales Order Type for each Sales Document type whether is it a . why? Note: 1. . look for the field Check Purchase Order No and put in "A".com Default First Date is not Today When end user created a new sales order with VA01. default First Date was always today. you will find that someone have actually change the configuration as it could not be a software bug since you have been using it for quite sometime without any problems. Before today. Best regards. There is one field (Lead time in days) which "specify the number of days after the current date that the proposal for the requested delivery date in the sales document should be".In the General Control Section. Verify the Sales order type configuration with the following path: IMG: Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Docs --> Sales Doc Hdr --> Define Sales Doc Types (transaction vov8) will let you control this by sales document type. after checking. 2. Although you mention that nobody change the system configuration.RE . it is very unlikely that the system will mis-behaved after one day.sap-img. SAP Basis.

transit time. Check in OVLZ ---> In Pick/pack time wrkdys. even if stock is available on the same day of order creation. In Tab: Shipping. What could be the reason? The reason could be there should be processing times configured in the system like.I have a stock of 10 Tons which is not reserved for any Sales order. I have created a sales order for 6 Tons. Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality). Next check the lead times. Please check the shipping point and also the route for different lead times. I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). T. if 5 is given in this field. T. any value is maintained there. Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1.. type and Double-Click. After creating sales order system should show as Doc date for confirming quantity for dispatch but it is showing the next day in the schedule line.pick/pack times. The other possibility could be holidays. select your sale order type and check the Field "Lead Time in Days". Also go to VOV8. for that you can go to the schedule line of the item and click on the Procurement tab.SAP SD User Ticket: Confirm quantity date is next day. Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value. system will allow to do PGI only after 5 days from the date of order created. Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. For example. It should have been blank . First check what the requested delivery date you have put in the order. I mean it is unrestricted stock.

T. Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. 3. After making the necessary IMG changes. you need to input the Delivery Plant field for each Materials that you want the system to propose the default date.. 4. double click on sales order type. Define whether the Material can be used at which Sales and Distribution process Here you define how the system responds when entering a sales and distribution document with this material in the differenet Sales and Distribution Process Flow. Data 1 and fill in the Delivery Plant. T. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields In-House production and GR Processing Time Auto proposed all the dates when creating Sales Order How can I make the system auto create all the Sales Order date during creation? Each Sales Order can have different date proposal settings. Testing: Now. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . Follows this step to set the default Sales Order Type proposal date: . To change the Materials field Delivery Plant: Goto MM02.2.Look and tick the fields Propose delivery date and Propose PO date. try creating a new sales order for the material and SAP will auto proposed all the dates in the sales order. Select the View Sales: Sales Org. remove it. . If it is mentioned any days. .Goto VOV8.

You can use the material status.Deliv. you can specify an order reason and assign a cost center to an order reason. no dialog 2. Alternatively. However the standard SAP works only at the header level though. You can set three types of reponse for each Sales and Distribution process :1. Set the material status parameters in transaction SM30. so it would not work if cost center is needed on the line item. Click Maintain and double click into the Materials Status code. If the document category for order type in IMG VOV8 is defined to be "I" which belong to order type FD . Table Views V_TVMS. OR To temporary block the creation of Sales Order for a certain materials.but there are some cases where the Cost Center must be exceptionally changed. error message (that is. to prevent orders from being entered for parts to be discontinued. the sales and distribution document cannot be entered on the basis of the material status) Assign a Cost Center manually in a Sales Order (VBAKKOSTL) The Cost Center Determination settings is in OVF3 .Free of Charge. then the field cost center is active for input during transaction VA01. warning when entering the document 3. The cost center are assign for such business transactions as : . for example.

It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery. either with/without the order reason.Returns . OVZG . you have to carry out the following steps: 1. For controlling transfer of requirements. Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only. 3. The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning. for example: Order reason: Damage in transit Order reason: Free sample Both the IMG settings are done in transaction OVF3. 4. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc. 2. Best regards. You must define a check group.Free deliveries . the sales documents at schedule line level. Sales and Distribution . It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level.Deliveries of advertising materials You can also make cost center allocation dependent on the order reason.Requirement class It specifies the following points: .Transfer of Requirements The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered..

then the system check for availability of goods.. 3. You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record. What Do You Mean By Transfer of requirements Explain transfer of requirement? How it works and how to configure? It specifies the following points: 1. .Requirements type V_TVEPZ_V . 5.whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment.Schedule line category OVZ2 . 6. The allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements.Assignment of requirement type to Transaction V_TVEP_V . (Use transaction SM30 for V_* configuration) OVZH . Whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment. Whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents. Then PP can do procure or produce the goods. then the system creates a TOR for the supply of goods to PP.the settlement profile. . . 4. 2.whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents. If the availability of goods is not there. Whether the requirements are relevant for MRP. fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible).the results analysis key.the allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements . . fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible). When a sales order is raised.Define Checking Group V_TMVFU . This can be configured by creating requirement class and requirement type and in the corresponding schedule line category requirement had to be checked.Define the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record.whether the requirements are relevant for MRP. The settlement profile. . The results analysis key.

schedule line category The transfer of requirements is controlled globally using the requirements class which is derived from the requirements type for all sales document types. the sales documents at schedule line level. The requirements type and. you have to carry out the following steps: 1.check group . For performing transfer of requirements. .The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered.requirements type . The following sections on the transfer of requirements describe how to control the transfer of requirements. requirements class are determined in the strategy group so all changes made there should also be coordinated with production. Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc. The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning. This fine tuning is described in the section "Defining the procedure for each schedule line category". 2. eventually. The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level.requirement class . Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only. For the sales document types. It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery. fine tuning is also possible at schedule line level. Note that the requirements classes are also used in production so you should coordinate any changes to the requirements classes with production. The transfer of requirements is basically dependent upon the following factors: .

you will maintain the tax code in Customer Master. 4. The SAP System determines the taxes automatically within pricing. you define the Tax Determination in VK12. Define the Customer Taxes in OVK3.3. using the country key. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. which will then be maintain in Material Master. coordinate the transfer of requirements with the module MM. Assign the plant for Tax Determination in OX10. the elements of tax calculation are predefined (for example. therefore. You must define a check group. For example :MWST GST MWST GST 0 1 Tax Exempt Liable for Taxes Now.Domestic Taxes/Export Taxes Condition Type Customer Taxes 0 0 MWST Material Taxes 0 1 Rate Taxes 0% 0% . More than one tax type can be defined for a country by defining the sequence. Define Tax Determination Rules You specify the valid tax types in transaction OVK1. It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. You must. Requirements transferred to planning are further processed in the module MM. tax condition type "MWST" for taxes on sales and purchases). In the standard SAP R/3 System. VK12 . the SAP System recognizes which tax type is valid for a plant and thus which taxes are relevant when creating an SD document. Define the Material Taxes in OVK4.

if you are selling a goods which are free for tax to any customer. as a SAP standard Best Practises. the MWST condition Defintions. it would be marked as . If your material is tax liable pur the Tax Indicator (at MMR as 1). 5) In anycase. if both the Customer Master and Material Master Tax code is 1. Accordingly.D (Not possible to process Manually). while processing a sales order. put the Tax Indicator (at MMR as '0'). Tax Code in Customer Master / Sales Order How can we maintain the Tax Code (Tax code . Tax will be included when you create the Sales Order.1 1 0 1 0% 9% In this example. at VK11 you need to mainatain your pricning conditions with all the combinations like: 10 11 01 00 4) While maintaining your Material Master Records or Cusotmer Master Records. If your customer is not liable for tax at all (like the case of Indian Defence organisations) put the Tax Indicator (at CMR as 0) or 1 in case fully tax liable. . 3) Now. at V/06. the field for 'Manual Entries'. whether is fully liable for tax or expemted (in case of Defence Customer) 2) There are few parameteres which we apply tax condition. The rate of tax is depend on various parameteres.which we maintain in MWST Condtion Records) in Customer Master or in Sales Order? There are few points which I would like to remind you: 1) MWST is a tax condition which is applied to customer to whom we are selling. Whether customer is tax liable? Whether material is tax exempted? For example. you must retrieve a Tax condition record from SAP database only and not entered Manually. you must identify. which are tax liable and which are tax exempeted.

> Pricing > Pricing control > Define & assign Pric. Example of CST : The Delivering plant & Ship to party geographic locations are 2 different states. Local sales tax is intra state whereas CST is inter state. Once that consignment is received at the ship to party state. the ST goes to that state govt. The rates are defined by the respective state governments. but the basic prices needed to be mentioned. Taxation Explain with an example I'm assuming that.e. There are two types of sales taxes. the country is India and based on its requirement: Sales tax is a state government revenue. you can only maintain Tax Indicator and not Tax Code. you can change the field at point 5) above to C-Manual entry is priority instead of D. At the point of sales from one state. Example of LST : Point of sale i. Local sales tax & central sales tax. sales tax will be levied once the sales is registered there. Stock transfer : This does not attract any sales tax. For this case. the LST that is applicable by the Ship to party further will not be applicable in all probability to be captured in SAP.7 is Factory sale with formula-JFACT. 6) In case your client insists for Manual entry of Tax code during Sales Order processing. the pricing procedure that is there in 4. you cannot maintain Condition tax code during sales order processing. delivering plant & ship to party are within the same state. The invoice that is accompanied with the consignment thus shall not have any final value.SPRO > S&D > Basic fn. And in Cusotmer Master. Now. procedure > Maintain Pric proc. in which the CST condition type is JIN1 & the LST is probably JIN2. The consignment is transferred from one D plant to another D plant irrespective of inter/intra state sales. There may be surcharge cond types as well which will calculate the amount on either JIN1 or JIN2. & consignment is despatched to the Ship to party. For config : 1. normally. . It's a zero value invoice. The selling organisations normally needs to register with the sales tax authority of the respective state to have a warehouse or D plant to avoid the double taxation for their dealers/distributors.Due to this setting.

I will have 1-LST 2%. When I create master records for LST thru VK11 for JIN2. They can be identical or different. You need to include the condition type for country IN in 'Define tax determin rule'.2. AP SD: Scheduling Agreement Vs Contract A schedule agreement contains details of a delivery schedule but a contract just contains quantity and price information and no details of specific delivery dates What's the difference between schedulling agreement with normal order? What's the condition for us to choose schedule line or order? Both of them contains schedule line.of schedule lines. One Forecast & the other JIT. I will try to demonstrate the smallest example. For customer master.Schedule agreements allow you to have 2 different sets of schedule lines (VBEPABART). > Taxes. Standard SAP you should have two sets of tabs . 3. One needs to understand here properly as u need to have unique combinations for picking the sales tax rates. Cust-Tax classi. Forecast forwards the schedule lines to planning (seen in MD04) and JIT passes them to shipping (VL10). The condition records will look like. Let's say. price. The tax rates are normally driven from the Tax classification of Customer & Material access. But normally this is standard. There are a couple major differences: (1) . the LST rates are 2%. To do this config. This is normally a FI job. Material tax claasi. The customer will provide you 4-10 weekly buckets (usually a . Tax codes can be created thru T code FTXP. Typically these are used for component supplier customers (namely Automotive). rates are flown from the tax codes. I will chose the access where the combinations of customer & material tax classifications are available. quantity. 1 for taxable & 2 for not taxable.4% & 0%. Same path : But go to Tax relevancy of master records where you configure the condition type & options of rates that will flow to these masters. If this access does not exist create it under an access sequence. S&D >Basic fn. Rate Tax code 1 1 2% A1 2 1 4% A1 3 1 0% A1 Remember. 2-LST4% & 3-LST0%. I will have two options for material master here.

is in "item data" table) 3) Put in the sales documents(21000000. where your lead times are 5+ days.click on " choose selection fields" button . Then execute. Also send you 1-2 weeks of individual FIRM ship dates . 21000001) you want to change and also the items(10) you want to change.entering the weekly. Schedule agreements are very nice when the customer sends EDI data (830s = forecast or 862s = JITs). These qtys are sometimes requested by the customer on ASNs. . cum qty corrections. missing requirements.From the Pool. Sales Order Mass Change I am a SAP SD consultant and recently faced with two new terms. (suppose your selection criteria fields are from "sales order header data" table and the field you want to change. mass order change and ALV .Monday date) of future forecast qtys. monthly forecasting qtys and entering standard sales orders (with or without multiple schedule lines) to represent the true firm qtys.which are entered on the JIT. 1) Try t-code [MASS] and select sales orders & execute 2) Choose the table or tables for your selection criteria and also for fields you want to change. move the fields you want to the "select fields" using arrows. and orders should work the same way too. Outside of that they can really cause trouble regarding daily maintenance. I also need to know about the transaction code. Cumulative qtys reset at year end unless you've got a customer calendar or you've modified standard SAP userexits to not reset. . The forecasted qtys they sent last week should account for this. Mass Maintenance: (Use to change multiple fields in multiple documents at the same time). but they don't want to suprise you with a large order qty. It comes down to the customer not knowing exactly what they need next week. (2) Cumulative Quantities are tracked and influence how the schedule agreement passes requirements to both forecasting and shipping. There is transaction MASS which can be used to carry out mass changes in the sales order and other objects. etc. One alternative would be to use customer independent requirements . year end processing. I have done mass change for customers.

then you are good to go.List will be provide for changes Sel Chg Fld: Billing Date Set new billing date value in the New Values field Click on lower billing date column Click on Carry out a Mass Change button Click on Save button Suggestion is to test this on a few orders in your development system to get a feel on how this works before applying this to any production data. you see the new value of the plant you entered at the top and the old values of item 10 are below. -save Note: it will take some time depending on how many records you have. (for example.Or you can just select by document numbers (May be more efficient) Execute .4)From mass maintenace menu. Note: If you have any user exits that affect the results. Is there a way to change the billing date on a ton of sales orders with same old billing date to a same new billing date? This can be done using the mass transaction: Transaction: MASS Object Type: BUS2032 Tables: SD Document: Business item data Sel Field: Billing Date (MASSSDHE and MASSSDPO) . export the spool file to a spreadsheet. I want to change plant for item 10) -enter the new value (of the plant to be) -click on "Adopt" and execute 5)In "sales order item data" tab. Check: Go to [SM37] and see the status of the job you are running and once finished. MASS is a very powerful tool. Then do the mass maintenance and compare the results with this one. you see all the old values are changed to new values. Before you do mass maintenance. go to the particular table in [se16] and get the results. ask them to deactivate the MODCHECKS still you are done with mass maintenance & activate them again. If they match. click on "Enter new field values" -click on "sales order item data" tab and choose the field you want to change. -click on "change field values" button. .

How to do rebate processing Rebates Processs in SAP is divided into three components 1) Configuring Rebates 2) Setting Up Rebates 3) Managing rebate agreeeements and payments Pre-requsiistes. However this requirement of your can be satisfied through authorisation profiles.The payer partner needs toi have the rebate field checked in the customer master on the sales area-billing doc tab. Release strategy for Sales order Is it possible to have release strategy for sales order? Satish C Jha As such SAP standard does not provide release strategy for sales orders similar to purchase orders. System will display all the re-pricing options. Go to the Menu EDIT --> MASS Change ---> New Pricing.The Sales Organisation must be marked as relevant for rebates. You can try for one or two order initially check the results and if it is OK. IMG-Sales and distribution-Sales-Sales documents-Define and assign status profile. what I mean to say is that the sale order to be kept incomplete by the person who does not have the required authorisation & the person with proper authorisation will complete it for further processing. . It will re-price all the sales orders. This is only one way of meeting your requirement. Select all sales orders you want to update the price. then you can do for others. 3. Balraj G Saigal In order to emulate a release strategy similar to purchase orders you can use the status profile in sales documents (BS02).Check the following: 1.The Billing type must be marked as relevant for rebates.I have 100000 sales orders whith an incorrect price and I would like to do a massive condition update with pricing type "B" (Carry out new pricing). Select B. Is there a transaction or program for this? Go to VA05 execute the report. 2.

Rebate related condition types are identified by codnition class -C. When rebate credit memo is created Customer account/ is debited and Accrual provision account is credited. The requirement should be 24 here which implies that the accruals are calculated on the basis of invoice/bill.sap-img. Enter 1 in field category for rebate specific. which could have different key fields. it defines how much can be paid out during a partial settlemetn. When you do manual payments. With Compliment: Srini I have this same problem found in: http://www. These accurals are based on sales volume and when they are posted billing is created int eh follwoing manner.htm . This means multiple tables for an access sequence can be aplied at the same time.alctyp and altcbv does not allow you to manipulate how a rebate is calculated.com/sap-sd/rebate-process-with-ref-to-so. Provision for accruals is debited and Sales revenue is credited.Condition Technique : Rebates. Use create access sequence (AS).. After defining and creating condition types for rebated include them in the pricing proceedure. please note that when rebates are created without dependent ona material but on customer/material you need to refer to a material for settlement. use the condition technique. Rebates have their wn field catalog and their own condition table naming convention. but distinguish themselves from pricing in applying to transactions over time. The other fields. You use partial settlement only when rebate agreement is defined for a full year but the paoyouts are supposed to happen on a monthly. The big difference between the rebate and the pricing access sequence is that there is no exclsuion flag available for rebate related AS. AS after going thru the right path of maintaining access sequence for rebates. Also. quarterly or anyother specified period. versus on a transaction basis.So you could have two condition table "001" one for pricing and one for rebates. remove the requiremnt 24. Now payment of rebates: Payments can be maunal or in full settlement. if u want to see reabtes at order time. Also. You need to use the technical names A001 For pricing and KOTe001 for rebates when you use the query type using transaction SE 16.

IN CUSTOMER MASTER. for eg if the customer agrees for Rs.Sreeram Note : I recomend you to study the theory part of why rebate and why not a discount. can somebody explain it as I have problem in understanding the link.1 Crore worth of business with u in 1 year. REBATE ACTIVATION. define a rebate agreement type 2. then you activate your rebate porocess. After having done this please proceed to maintain the condition record for the rebates (transaction code-vbo1) . The rebates are based on the volume of the business the customer does with you within a specified time. Assign the agreement type to the condition type group Assign the cond type group to the condition type. This will help you understand better. What exactly do you wish to know in Rebates? The total outline of the Rebate process or each and every step in the SAP system? First of all rebates are more or less discounts which are offered to customers. Once you have defined all the 3 and assignment starts. The rebates are passed on to the customer in the form of Credit notes.(IN -IMG) 1. if at the end of the year the customer DOES achieve the target u offer him say 2/3/4 % whatever is decided.ACCRUAL KEY = ERU YOU ALSO HAVE TO DO THE ACCOUNT DETERMINATION FOR REBATES. SALES ORGANISATION AND FOR THE BILLING DOCUMENT. define a condition type group 3. This is broadly the outline of the rebate process. The rebate can be given to the customer at one time or in installments also. Condition technique is also used in rebates.(REQUIREMENT=24) ALSO IN THE PROCEDURE. May be I can help you with rebate process. define a condition type and place this condition Type in the pricing procedure.However. R.

create settlement run using credit memo request and then credit memo to settle this amount with the customer. Create condition record for rebate giving the rebate rate and accrual rate. The rebate process is completed when you have created a credit memo to the customer. the rebate and accruals are determined and posted in a seperate GL account as a noted item .the rebate will be affected in the billing document and if you dont give the requirement as 24 your rebate will be affected in the sales order.Note: if you maintain the requirement coloumn with the requirement as 24 . 2. The document type for the partial settlement is R3. . First you need to create a Rebate agreement. DELIVERY AND BILLING. 4. Please make sure you open two screens SO THAT YOU CAN COMPARE THE NEW ENTRIES WHAT EVER YOU'RE DEFINING WITH THAT OF THE STANDARDS or first you try with the standard condition type boo1. to SO If I need to make a rebate for a customer what is the process involved. boo2 boo3 boo4. Praveen In a simple way. This is what the link says. I hope this will be of any help to you. 1. Shrinivas Rebate Process with Ref. GO TO THE CONDITION RECORD IN CHANGE MODE (VB02) AND SETTLE THE ACCOUNT PARTIALLY. I am providing some info on rebates which I know.amount to be settled. AFTER YOU HAVE FINISHED A COMPLETE SALES CYCLE OF CREATION ORDER . 3. Also it gets copied in the rebate agreement. when the rebate relevent billing doc is generated.

. then the accounting will be generated saying 27$ paid towards rebate and 3$ is the accrual which you owe to the customer Procedure: Rebate agreement: Transaction code: VB01 When you go to VB01. Consider an example.. Rebate setllement Go to VB02 enter ur sales deal no.save the doc now.. Then go to VF01 and enter the credit memo reqst no generated.. Now when you make the rebate settlement by doiing the Credit memo and you decide to pay $27. View the credit memo request Remove the Billing bloock Go to VA01 and put order type G2 ..Rebate agreemnts is based on agreement types. You decided to give a rebate of 3% to a customer whose sales vol is $1000 for a particular SO Then the rebate value is $30.condition records specify the rebate rate and the accrual rates. choose agreement type 0002 and then in conditions give Material rebate 1 20 20 30 Now create a sales order with a material say M-11 for SOrg 1000 12 00 with QTY 6 Now check VB03 and see rebate agreemtent it will say Accruals 120 and payments 0 since your rebate is not settled still..Conditon records which are created like B001 and B002 are linked to the rebate agreeements specifying the rebate rate + the accrual rates.....save the doc no and go to VF02 and say release to accounting Now the final settlement will be this way .go to create with ref and enter ur Sales order no. and change the agreemetn status to B then enter Shift+F12 and enter the amount to be paid for example u say $80 Then check in rebate payments rebate doc and partial setllemetn since you have not paid in full.

You can see the rebate condition in the invoice only. and go to VA02. enter the customer code. Once you have posted the invoices. For settlement change the status of the rebate to B .release for the settlement. 9. remove the blocks if any and create an invoice (credit memo).V/08 3. 5. Credit memo request will b generated copy the no. Also you need to maintain the material for the settlement 4. Again go to rebate aggreement and check the status it will show you D . 10. Create a condition by copying a a standard condition like BO03 in V/06 2.Accruals:120 Accrual reversed:80 Rebate pay:80 Amount payable:40 So the balance 40 is still the accrual This is an example how a rebate will be processed with ref to a SO with an example. Create a sales order for that customer and check the rebate agreement.accounting document it will show u the accrual as negative. 8. Assign this condition in the std pricing procedure with acct key as ERB and accural key as ERU . then go to rebate agrrement no. click on the conditions enter the percentage and accrual amount.this will show u the accrual amount. 6. clicl on verficayion and it will show the order details. No will be generated choose 003 . You also can have scales in this.Customer rebates. the validity and check for the status shld be in Open. 7.Create a Rebate Agreement in VBO1 (It is O = Owl and not zero). In both the invoice and the credit memo check the posting .Final settlement of agreement already carried out Consignment Sales Process in SAP The consignment process in SAP standard consist of four small processes: . SAP SD Tips by: Priyam How to do a rebate agreement for a specific customers with settings details? 1.

It is defined in 4 steps. but the materials are returned to the consignment stock instead of plant stock returns). If he returns the stock you will accept the stock to take it back. (the flow is very similar to a normal OR flow. (the flow is very similar to a normal RE flow. How to perform a consignment order? In consignment orders you are allowing the stock to sit in your customer location. Here you have a consignment fillup order and a consignment fillup delivery. you will set movement type 631 & set for availability check and TOR. It will not be relevent for billing and pricing because you are not charging money for these goods in this step. Here you have a consignment return order. but the materials are issued from the consignment stock instead of plant stock unrestricted). consignment return delivery and a consignment return invoice. Consignment fill up: Sales document type is KB Item category KBN shedule line category E1 In this step. In schedule line category. Note that in consignment fillup and consignment pickup there are no invoices since there is no change of ownership for the materials. Once he informs that he used the stock you will invoice him. you are not invoicing the customer. document flow is sales order ---delivery item category. Consignment pickup (pickup consignment stock and move it to plant stock). Consignment return (return materials from customer ownership to customer consignment).Consignment fillup (send materials to customer consignment). Consignment issue (issue materials from customer consignment to the customer). consignment issue delivery and a consignment issue invoice. 1. Here you have a consignment issue order. . Here you have a consignment pickup order and a consignment pickup delivery.

that you are creating this document. In schedule line category. special stock. Your setting schedule line item category: 634 movement type. Once the customer informed you that he used all the goods or partial goods then you will create consignment issue for used goods. you will create return order. MRP. pricing. delivery. Consignment Pick up: Even if you create the consignment return the goods are not come to direct to your plant. Sales document type: KR Item category: KRN Shedule line category: D0 You will assign delivery document and billing to sales document. your setting is 633 movement type. you are setting relevent for billing. Sales document: KE Item category: KEN shedule line category: C0 or C1 Here you are invoicing the customer(because he used the goods). For that you need to create consignment pick up. any shedule line category relevent for 632 movement type. Your setting item category relevent for billing. Consignment Return: Customer found that some goods are damaged or he not able to sold the goods he want to send it back. you are assigning the delivery documnt and billing document to the sales document. pricing. 3. special stock. Assign retrun delivery to sales document type. relevent for availability check & TOR. availability check. NO availability NO TOR. return delivery.2. In item category. Sales document: KA Item category: KAN schedule line category: F0 & F1 Your setting item category relevent for returns. return billing. 4. here the owner ship is not changing so you do not need to create billing. returns. . Consignment Issue.

Now in next screen create the record as follows: .Say 34 cartons.Ugameswara Issue free goods to selected Customers Client wants to issue free goods to selected customers after the said customer buys a specified quantity of a good during the festive season starting 02 December to mid January.First select the exclusive button and verify that you are in exclusive view. VBN2 to first create master record for free goods as follows: Enter following information in selection screen: . VBN2 is to change the record. distribution channel. VBN1 creates it. customer # and execute. Min qty .Sales org. Stock will increase. for example customer A buys 34 cartons of Corn Icecream. The system will automatically propose the free goods item at no additional charge. (that is if you want exclusive) .Run trans. Try higher order qtys and see if the free goods qty are scaling up. the rest of the system is already up and running and should not be inconvinienced. Now run VA01 for 34 cartons and press enter. we offer him 12 free corns. this should then reflect as cost in our accounts. Sorry for the error.Free goods type: NA00 . (check in what units you want to manage) From: 34 cartons unit of measure: Free goods: 12 Pcs Unit of measure: Pcs Calcualtion type: 1 or try the other options Deliver control: Blank or any of the other options suitable to you. Rao *-. How do I set it up? 1. . Now save and exit.Material#.Now you check your plant stock. If not adjust the calculation parameters in the master record screen It should be transaction VBN1.

it cannot be allocated to a group. the screen fields are allocated to so-called modification groups 1 .S&D-> Basic > Functions-> Log of incomplete Procedures => select the fields > from the tables and the system will check for them (OVA2/VUA2) To make a filed entry enabled or grey (non-entry allowed): User exits in the program MV45AFZZ-USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION This user exit can be used to modify the attributes of the screen fields. If a field has no field name. To do this. Active Free goods Determination or Assign with your sales organisation this procedure ZFREE 8. maintain pricing procedure say ZFREE with condition type FREE Now assign: 7. create a condition type say FREE with 6. add a feild catalog for CUSTOMER GROUP 3. The usage of the field groups (modification group 1-4) is as follows: . create a sequence say FREE with condition table 555 5. create a customer group say 99 for FREE GOODS In Free Goods Menu: 2.4 and can be edited together during a modification in ABAP.Kris J If you want to give free goods to some of the customers than 1. create a condition table (free goods) say 555 only for customer group 4. Create free goods determination with transaction code /nvbn1 for FREE with Key Csuomer Group 99 for exclusive Give customer Group say 99 and from 34 to 34 free 12 Supressing Fields in Sale Order To make optional / mandatory you can use in IMG .

We are doing it in our company. You place the authority check object in authorization profile in the role of the users. who should have access to the field (in this case it is VBKD-ABSSC). This FORM routine is called up by the module FELDAUSWAHL. else. With Compliments by: Taner Yuksel Actually suppressing fielding sales orders userwise is quite easy. AUTHORITY-CHECK OBJECT 'ZMV45AFZZ' ID 'SCRFNAME' FIELD SCREENNAME. endif. ENDIF. the whole process.Modification group 1: Automatic modification with transaction MFAW Modification group 2: It contains 'LOO' for step loop fields Modification group 3: For modifications which depend on check tables or on other fixed information Modification group 4: is not used The FORM routine is called up for every field of a screen. . With Compliments by: Martishev Sabir Some Light on Batch Determination On batch determination. If you require changes to be made. and there assign the corresponding fields that are to be accessed via this userexit. For this we use userexit FORM USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION in MV45AFZZ. SCREEN-INPUT = 1. how it is determined automatically in the order. you must make them in this user exit. IF sy-subrc = 0. Below is the sample code IF SCREEN-NAME = 'VBKD-ABSSC'. SCREEN-INPUT = 0.

Material determination is very closely related to item proposal /product proposal and is used to swap one material for another in the sales order using the condition . Resistance for Electric Items. Then Create the Batch Determination Record using VCH1.This number is then linked to the customer master data in the sales view. Item proposal is the list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order from the customer master data. because at the time of order material may or may not be created.Give the value of the characteristics in this batch. We use VA51 to create the item proposal. Difference between Item Proposal and Material Determination What is the difference between the item proposal and material determination product proposal? Item proposal and product proposal are the same. Then in your material master Classification View Enter this class. Ex: Purity for Medicines. A2) Batch Determination during order Creation. Here we get a number.for this material should be configured with batch and batch determination should be checked in sales views of material. Strategy Types and assignment to sales docs etc). You need to create a class (You might have to create a new class type) which incorporates the characteristic. Then go to SPRO ->Logistics General ->Batch Management and maintain the Condition Technique (Procedure. For this you need to maintain a Classes d for you Material. This is very commonly used. Then Create a Batch for the particular plant and Stor Loc using MSC1N.A1) Normaly we use batch determination at delivery level. First Create the Characteristic Using Ct04 and then using Cl02 create the Class including this characteristic. Depending on the Manufacturing process you can define the characteristics for your material.

4) In [VA01] to create a sales order. I have not seen Material determination procedures used in the projects I have worked." 1) Use transaction [VOV8] to configure the document type ("MS" for product proposal).technique. And [OV12] for configuration of material determination. SAP Tips by: Prashanth Harish Item Proposal or Product proposal: "Item proposal is same as product proposal & SAP uses the two terms interchangeably. where in values mention the Color of the bile like Red.KMAT type with Item category (002) Create Charateristics in CT04 .Zbike. 2) Use transaction [VA51] to create a proposal." Material determination: "Material determination uses the condition technique to swap one material for another when certain conditions apply. 3) Enter the item proposal on the sales area data (sales tab) of the customer master record. Material determination is triggered by the material entered in the line item of the sales order. Items can also be selected from a list and copied into a sales order. Use transaction [VB11] to create a material determination condition record." SAP Tips by: Minmini Steps for SD Variant Configuration Some light on Variant Configuration in Detail. Material determination is useful when old product is becoming obsolete or a new product is released by the company at specific date. "An item proposal is a list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order. Select Edit & propose items. The procedure is as follows: y y Create a Material . Blue etc .

What is class? .And the transaction codes for the above.Balaji .Select Procedure enter in front of 10 write .select Red. Now go back to CT04 .What is variant configuration? .ZPrice='Red' and save Now go back go to extras .ZBikeclass ( Type 300) in characteristics tab page.Enter VA00 (Condition)(For Std RVA001 Pricing Procedure) . Again this will be having values like processor can be either P4 or P3.assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save) Now go to VK11 .What is characteristic? .Editor . *-. Then go to CU41 Configuration profile select the material and enter the description click on the class assignment ie assign Zbikclass. keyboard. where directly go the additional data tab and maintain the table SDCOM and field VKOND (ABAP Dictionary it will ask for) Assign these two characteristics to a Class in CL01 .enter variant Red and Blue give the rates accordingly and create *-.$self. Possible questions you can expect are: .go to extras Other Dependencies . monitor. mouse etc).assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save) Now select Blue.Other Dependencies . monitor can be 15" or 17" etc.ZPrice='Blue' and save Now go back go to extras .Other Dependencies .Other Dependencies .ZPrice.y y y y y y y y Create another characteristics in CT04 . These components are called as characteristics in variant config. Tell me about variant configaration? What are the type of questions we can expect in that? Variant configuration is used where you have a configurable material like computer (made up of components like processor.What is dependency and what are the types? . Based on the values selected the variant pricing will happen using the condition type VA00.Select Procedure enter in front 10 write $self.What is configuration profile? .What is a variant table? .go to extras .Shaik Zaheeruddin the sales order.enter Zbike -go to values.What is value? .

you should ensure that it should not be there in the system as existing. you will be required to maintain Number Ranges for Sales Documents which are allowed for your New Sales Area. however it can be maintained externally also if you customize it accordingly. Here you provide the system a specific Number range as follows: Number range Key +Start Number range+ End Number Range+Current Number For Example: If you want to propose the following Number Range *1 9000076000 9000076999 0 The Current Number field will be kept zero as you are proposing new number range and no sales documents have been created on it . while proposing your key...... So choose a key that is unique. If you propose a key that is there in the system or if the Number Range (Start and End Series) is there in the system already. . the system will throw a message that Interval already already exists. Obviously. and which is not there in the system.. Number Ranges can be maintained Internally by the system.Number Ranges In Sales Order This is regarding number ranges defining and assigning tips which you can follow as below: Whenever there is a new Sales Org being created. In Standard SAP the Transaction code for Maintaiing Number ranges externally is VN01..M2. Defining . For example: !1. you are assigning a Key to a Number Range Series. Here .The same can be reached through in IMG as : Sales & Distribution->Sales-->Sales Document Header-->Define Number Ranges for Sales Documents. by making this . All the symbols can be used along with numbers from 0 to 9 and Alphabets from A to Z and in any order... BB. ^A. *1 is a Unique Two digit Alphanumeric Key.Z*.

2. A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo. Similarly. The Assigning Part is done as follows: The Two digit Alpha Numeric Key is maintained or Assigned to the respective Sales Document type in V0V8. For eg. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer. for example. Tips by : Vivek Sahni What is Debit note and Credit note What is Debit note and Credit note? What is the purpose? How we create? 1. Here you put the Two Digit Number key in the Field. If the request is approved.In Assigning. This can also be reached in IMG by: Sales & Distribution-->Sales-->Sales Document Header-->Define Sales Document Types Locate the particular Sales Doc Type. The customer could return damaged goods. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten.Assigning . you assign the particular Sales Document to the Number Range you have already proposed as above."Number range External Assignment" Besides this: If a new Shipping Point is created then Delivery Number ranges are required to be maintained. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. and double click on it to display it configuration. If the price calculated for the customer is too high. If a new Plant is created then Billing Number Ranges are required to be maintained. you can create a credit memo request. you can remove the .

you have the following assignment options: . the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. the payment programme processes them automatically. When it has been approved.block.Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos. You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways: ± Without reference to an order ± With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). For this first create a sales document with the order type for a credit or debit memo request. the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. you can post a debit memo to the vendor.Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice .Assignment to a single invoice . there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI). 3. The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo. you can remove the block. If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice item. As mentioned above. calculated with the wrong scaled prices. credit memo requests. and payments. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. for example. For credit memos. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low. you can create a debit memo request. If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer. ± With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit . In all cases. who is to reimburse the amount. 4. It is like a standard order. Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them.

As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones. 2. you can remove the block. For credit memos. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten. You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing. you have the following assignment options: y y y Assignment to a single invoice Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos. Tips by : Rajendran Explain What Is Credit and Debit Memo 1. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). by another department. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected. credit memo requests. The customer could return damaged goods. there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI). If the price calculated for the customer is too high. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because. for example. If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice . If the request is approved. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked. and payments. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents.if necessary. the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them. For eg. the payment programmed processes them automatically. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section.memo 5. . A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo. you can create a credit memo request.

The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones.if necessary. 5. 4. 3. For this first create a sales document with the order type for a credit or debit memo request. It is like a standard order. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer.item. for example. Use the same Invoice Script/smartform for Credit/debit memo's INVOICE Output type : RD00 ScriptForm Name : RVINVOICE01 . You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing. . you can post a debit memo to the vendor. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low. If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. As mentioned above. Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section. by another department. calculated with the wrong scaled prices. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected. the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. y With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to. you can remove the block. When it has been approved. who is to reimburse the amount. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. you can create a debit memo request. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit memo. In all cases. You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways: y y Without reference to an order With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to.

How to configure the inter-company Stock Transport Order? .Prassee Material should exist in both the plants (Delivering & Ordering). The Process is you create a STO do delivery against the STO and create a Billing Document against the STO. Internal customer should be assigned to the ordering plant ( MM -> Purchasing -> Purchase Order -> Setup stock transport order -> assign the internal customer to the ordering plant and assign the Sales area of the internal customer. Tcode : OMGN . It is used for inter company transfer of goods.Driver Program Name : RVADIN01 smartform name : LB_BIL_INVOICE Smartform Driver Pgm: RLB_INVOICE Configure Intercompany Stock Transport Order Explain STO. Plant to plant transfer and even transferring raw material to Third party contractors (Job Work). STO is Stock Transport order.

the goods may be manufactured by a delivering plant belonging the company code 1000. Select the Delivery creation line and do the back ground process. The sales organization then invoices the customer for the materials purchased. Inter Company Sales Process Explain the Inter Company Sales Process.Assign its Sales area to the delivering plant Assign the document type and Delivery type NB and NLCC Assign the Supplying plant --> Receiving Plant --> NB Take the delivering plant and assign the sales area. Vendor master has to be created and assaign the supply source ( Delivering Plant). Start the log display and see the delivery document number by the documents button Goto VL02N --> do picking and PGI --> Then do the MIGO with respect to the delivery document. SAP R/3 automatically creates an intercompany billing document at the same time as the customer¶s billing . However. In SAP sales & distribution module. Billing (Intercompany pricing conditions should be set). The transaction path for accessing intercompany sales billing is: IMG >> Sales and distribution >> Billing >> Intercompany billing Let us take an example to understand intercompany sales better. A customer may place an order for goods in sales organization belonging to company code 3000. Suppose there are two company codes namely 1000 and 2000. Create a puchase order ME21N ---> Save Delivery VL10 G ---> Calculation rule (appropriate) --> Assaign the purchase order number here and execute. A sales order is created indicating delivering plant of company code 1000. an intercompany sales occurs when the selling organization belongs to a different company code than the delivering plant.

However. . that¶s the reason you enter delivering plant while creating sales order.Material should exist in both plants.document is created. they request for their sister concern company to deliver these ordered goods to the customer directly. one may find a need to transfer stock between two different company codes.Maintain the intercomapny billing type (IV) in ur sales doc type (OR).R (Receiving) become the customer of Plant-D. So create a dummy customer in Plant-D's company code and sales area. if the stock be transferred within the same company code.Assign this customer number to Plant -R's details & its selling sales area.Stock will be maintained in D-Plant (Delivering). As a rule of thumb. .company sales process. Below is the inter-company check list: Check all your settings once again for creating inter-company billing: . after delivery they will receive intercompany invoice from the delivering company code.Assign the Plant-D to selling sales org+ dbt channel. if the end user knows there is no stock on their plant. when dealing with different company codes. no PO will raise. IV doc's DPP along with Delivering plant's sales area) . . . While creating sales order.Maintain relevant copy controls between documents.Determine pricing procedure for Standard (RVAA01) as well as Intercompany (ICAA01) (Note: Dummy customer's CPP. This intercompany invoice is sent from the delivering plant to the selling sales organization. a transfer of value occurs and is an intercompany sale. But in case the stock is transferred between different company codes.Now Plant . . . there is no need for an intercompany transaction. --In inter. .

Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. Sales Order.. 2. B. but you'll find IV01-. If possible use standard sales order.VK11 (Note: In ICAA01. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area. if you observe the details of IV01 C. Quotation. Normal Sales Order Cycle Configuration What are those initial sales order config? By: Anuradha Normal Sales Order Cycle:Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1.observe bill type-F2. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. . Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. .. To create new sales order type. . it has the ref Ctype as "PI01" . you won't find any PI01 Ctype.Maintain the condition records for Condition type PI01. etc.) . else Sales Order creation will give error. enter the required fields.Now create VA01. such as Inquiry. in delivering plant -enter Plant-D.Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL again)--observe the bill type-IV.Create Delivery VL01n.type in V/06. Sales Document Type: The sales document types represent the different business transactions. 3. always copy as with reference to similar sales order. through which the condition record of PI01 is shared to IV01 also. with ref to SO. . @ item level as well as @ header level.Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL)--. and save.

Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. 3. 2. copy as from standard & maintain New. use standard. 2. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category. Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. copy as from standard & maintain New. 3. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range. Incase if required to create new. Default Storage Location In Sales Order Where to maintain settings if we want to make storage location appear by default at the time of creating the sales order? . Incase if required to create new. The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. Incase if required to create new. 2. 2. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. Deliver to Billing. Incase if required to create new.Sales Document Item: 1. copy as from standard & maintain New. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1. etc. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > 1. Assign Item Categories: If possible. use standard. Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. copy as from standard & maintain New. Incase if required to create new. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. copy as from standard & maintain New.

the storage location has to be entered manually at item level or you have to go for development so that it will be defaulted under the specific conditions specified. A userexit has to be used so that it will default the appropriate storage location after checking the table. The storage location entered in the order item is copied into the outbound delivery.. Storage location will be determined at Delivery level only. The system determines the picking location based on a MALA. User has to indicate it at time of creating sales order.to default in item. USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAP -. If no storage location for picking is specified in the order item.There is No storage location determination at Sales order level. You cannot configure storage location into sales order: you need to use user exit MV45AFZB USEREXIT_SOURCE_DETERMIN or You can use userexit_save_document Userexit_save_document_prepare or The relevant forms to be used are: USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAK -. You have to create a Z-table and maintain the table with data under which that specific storage location has to be determined. If you want the system to check the stock at a specific storage location. System does not determine storage location at sales order level. Only we can enter manually. the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item. This functionality is not available in the standard SAP. User exit: MV45AFZZ --- .to default in Header. RETA. Storage loction determination in Sales order is only possible via a user exit. MARA rule defined in the delivery type..

then its status will be open . . But at deliver it'll determine automatic. You can check the open order status in VA02 in status tab. Billing document : when billing document is created and saved. the status becomes "cleared". 4. they are: 1. the status of billing becomes "complete" as well. Open Sales order : I will explain taking an example. 2. then you have to use user EXIT. the status of the delivery becomes "complete".Standard SAP can't determine storage location at sales order level. hence. If required to give manually. In order. Payments posting affects the status of the accounting document. the status remains at "being processed". the status of the order changes from "open" to "completed". In SAP SD. (double click on item and at item level chk the status) or check in transaction VA05 all the open orders. i. the document flow will summarize the status of each document. Explain The Meaning Of An Open Sales Order What is an open sales order? An open sales order is where the order has not been delivered (physical goods). because it is not fully delivered. Sales order : once delivery has been created. suppose there is an order for 100 qty and against this order. Do the proper settings at Delivery level: SPRO --> LOGISTICS EXECUTION --> SHIPPING --> PICKING --> DETERMINE PICKING LOCATION --> Define Rules for Picking Location Determination. Outbound delivery : when items are picked and posted for goods issue. only 50 are being delivered till its delivery date . once payment is posted with reference to this accounting document. and posted to accounting. you look at table BSEG. 3.e. the status becomes complete only when billing is done. an accounting document is created and the status is "not cleared". it is partially delivered. If sales order level by default require.

Delivery will be open against which billing is not happened. Or you can check one by one order & reject the pending item.in the menu bar go to sales document-then DELETE.Enter your doc no. system giving default sold to party. not open order. that sales order will be considered as complete order. How to disable this? . Table VBAP / VBAK / VBUK (header) and VBUP (item) Which table is updated when customer pays against an invoice? Check table VBAK / VBAP / VBRK / VBRP and VBFA you can chk the document flow. here you can see list of all Sales order open for any particular sales area. If you have not delivered any quantity. How to close any open sales order? Go to transaction VA05. Go to VA02. Can you tell if a sales order can be considered open if delivery has happened but payment has not been done yet? Yes.How can we know using data in tables whether a sales order is open or not? Check in Transaction VA05 and in table the status filed will tell you the status of open order. then you can delete the sales order from the tcode VA02 . Now select the line item and assign Reason for Rejection which you will find on the right top side. Sold To Party In Sales Order Screen After entering sales order (va01) screen. input the sale order and execute. You can either do mass maintenance to close all the open order by giving rejection reason.

This is due to activation of userexit V45A0002. You need to deactivate this. Take the help from ABAPer to find the project which is assigned to the userexit and deactivate the same. or Can you also check in your SU3 Parameters whether there is any entry with Parameter ID - VAU? If some value is set for this parameter , it will be copied by default in SOLD-TOPARTY during creation of the Sales Document (VA01) You can remove this ID or clear the Value. You can also check if there is any Transaction Variant associated with your Transaction in SHD0 through which the default sold-to-party can come. --Change sold to party in sales order We have the below requirement of changing sold to party after creation of sales order: Once sales order is created, purchase requisition is created automatically and purchase order is created with reference to the purchase requisition. So when Goods receipt is done, the respective stock is getting reserved for that sales order. We wanted to change the sold to party option. After creation of purchase order, sold to party option in sales order is display only. How to make it changeable? As long as you have not created subsequent document like delivery or invoice, you can change the sold to party in sale order either in creation mode (VA01) or in change mode (VA02). But once you created the subsequent document, you cannot change the sold to party bocz, the said field will become uneditable. --Effect of sold to party in sales order

What is the effect of sold to party in sales order? Suppose we are creating the sales order with customer '11' and material 'abc', but before saving the sales order document we changed the customer and new customer is '21', so after this change which is redetermined in the sales order. These will get redetermine -->Tax -->Price -->Frieght -->Payment terms -->Shipping conditions -->Partner (Ship to party, bill to party and Payer). -->Route. If the Sold to party is changed from 11 to 21, then the new SP (21) may be valid for some other Sales Area, may have different SH,PY &BP. So accordingly those data will change. If different SP, then Price may vary, Shipping condition may vary. So those data may change. As different SH may be different, then Route may be different, Plant may be different, and as Tax is mostly Plant dependent, so Tax may change. If SP is different PY may be different, so Payment Term, Incoterm & Credit limit may be different, so those data will be changed/redetermined accordingly.

Profit Center Default In Sales Order
Question: In sales order we have profit center tab in line item --> account assignment. From where does this profit center comes here? The source I mean. Answer:

Sales order takes profit center from material master view Sales: Plant/General data. Profit center is assigned in (material master record) MMR in sales orgn 2 view. If you assign there automatically it will trigger in the sales order. In the item data -> account assignment tab . This profit center is used in MMR because, once you do OR- LF- F2 for that material this material value has to trigger in the profit center in FI properly. After doing F2 and when you save a the Invoice i.e., F2, automatically an accounting document gets generated along with a profit center document also gets generated if you have assigned profit center to your MMR. In material master, I was created profit center PBB2K for part A but it is showing different profit center when sales order created. Advise why different profit center show in sales order? Check 0KEM for any sales order substitution for profit center. In general, the material master profit center defaults to profit center, but at sales order you can change the profit center otherwise check 0KEM It seems as though we have a FI setup in our system through which the Profit Center on the Sales Order is NOT defaulted from the Material master, but is showing up another value, could you please provide me the steps where I could look that up? What configuration is it from the FI side that is preventing the standard material PC to be over ridden? Please check OKB9, or Simple, It is in substitution, Go to transaction GGB1 and see under the node profit center accounting. You will see that you can substitute the profit center in the sales order using substitution.

You can define your own here. How can I make the Field Profit Center in the line item level of the sales order to mandatory? You can do this by transaction variant. Goto tcode SHD0, give t code as VA01. Make a transaction variant and make the fields mandatory. or Please include the Field Profit Center (PRCTR) in incompletion Procedure of Sales Order Item. So without Profit Center Entry Sales Order will be incomplete. Goto T.code OVA2 copy the procedure you are now working with and add the field vbap-Prctr. In VUP2 you can assign your new procedure to your item category.

Check Whether The Entries Is Maintain in LIS Update or Not
Path: SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Header Level Maintain following data, separately in two rows: Sales Org: say,1234 DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh:

Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 2 SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Item Level Maintain following data, separately in two rows: Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 1 Statistics group for the item category: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 2 Statistics group for the item category: 2 Note: Once, you will maintain Settings for LIS-Update, it will update onwards transactions and will not update for already done transactions.

3PL Purchase Order Link To Sales Order
For third party order, either you can create the material master with item category group as BANS, so the system will automatically pick TAS in the sales order for the material or you can change the item category manually to TAS in the order. This will trigger a PR, based on the PR a PO will be generated. Defining Item Category Group

strategy Blank Mat. Blank Rounding permitted Blank Order qty = 1 Blank Incomplete proced.. variant action Blank ATP material variant Blank Structure scope Blank Application Blank Value contract material Blank . 28 PartnerDetermProced T TextDetermProcedure 01 Item cat.IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item > Define Item category groups Defining Item Category -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories Item category TAS Description 3rd party with SN CM Item type Blank Completion rule Blank Special stock Blank Relevant for billing B Billing plan type Blank Billing block Blank Pricing X Statistical value Blank Revenue recognition Blank Delimit. Blank Config. group N Status profile Blank Create PO autom. status group 1 Screen seq.relevant X Credit active X Determine cost X Aut. batch determ. line allowed X Item relev. start date Blank Business data item X Sched. for delivery Blank Returns Blank Weight/Vol.

Contract release ctrl Blank Repair procedure Blank Billing form Blank DIP profile Blank Assigning Item Category IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item > Assign Item categories Creating Material MM01 1. On the screen Create Material (Initial Screen) enter the material number if External. 2. Choose Select View(s). (Basic View 1&2, Sales Views, Purchasing views and accounting views). 3. Enter the relevant data and save the material. Use material group BANS in the item material group field. Creating SD Pricing Conditions for material VK11 Creating Vendor Master XK01

What is the Foreign trade data required in SO for doing Exports
I am doing export sale but while creating billing document system give error that "Missing export data" hence accounting document has not created. Trouble Shooting and Problem Solving : Go to VF02, input the billing document and execute. From top menu bar, click on "Goto -- Header -- Foreign Trade/Customs".

There again click on "Incompleteness analysis" which will be below to "Head.text" tab so that it will take you to the areas where you need to fill in the required datas. Once you gave all the data and save, you can check the log as "Document complete". Solution : This will resolve the issue for current Invoice; but if the same error is occurring for every Invoice, maintain default values. To get the default values for foreign trade data go to 1. IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Business Transaction Types And Default Value --> Define Default Business Type (SD) In this step maintain assignments for country/sales org/dist channel / item category / and transaction type combination. 2. IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Procedures and Default Value --> Define procedure default In this step maintain assignments with the combination of country/sales org/dist channel/division/exp.imp group/item category/ procedure. Apart from the above we need to maintain Comm./imp. code no./country of origin and region of origin at material master HINT: Go to VTFL, select your billing type and delivery type and click on blue magnifying lens on top left so that it will take you to a screen where most probably, you would be maintaining "B" for "Determ.export data". Maintain blank field there and save. Now system will not throw incomplete error message.

Material To Be Added or Excluded To a Customer
How to setup material exclusion for customer during sales order creation? If you want specific material to be added or excluded to a customer, you can do it in "Listing and Exclusion".

Here is a small note on listing and exclusion, it may be helpful. Material listing and exclusion: Material listing: Whatever the materials that are placed in the listing for a customer he can access to those materials only. Maintaining records for material listing: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for listing Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in listing and save it. Material Exclusion: Whatever the materials that are placed in exclusion for a customer he cannot access those materials. Maintaining records for material Exclusion: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for exclusion Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in exclusion and save it. Maintaining condition technique for listing and exclusion: SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Listing/Exclusion

Maintain condition tables for listing/exclusion Maintain access sequence for listing/exclusion Maintain listing/exclusion types Go to new entries and define condition types one each for listing, exclusion Procedure for maintaining listing/exclusion Define the procedure one each for listing and exclusion Activate listing/exclusion by sales document type Select the required sales document type and assign the procedure for listing and exclusion Note: 1. Listing type A001 2. Exclusion type B001 3. Procedure for listing A00001 4. Procedure for exclusion B00001

Sales Order Number Blank In MD04
I have a sales order which is complete in all respects. The sales order appears in MD04 with correct date and quantity. However MD04 does not show the sales order number. (number is blank) Delivery can be created from this sales order. This delivery is seen in MD04 with correct date and quantity, but the delivery number is not shown in MD04. Delivery is successfully PGI'ed subsequently. Why the numbers that are saved in SD not shown in MD04? Solution: Check in Material Master - MRP3 View. Availability Check might be maintained as "01" - Daily requirement. If is, then the sales order number will not appear in MD04 list. SO number will appear for 02- Individual requirement. Fyi:

Once sales order is created - it will be appear in MD04, once delivery is created wrt: SO ( w/o PGI), then delivery number will appear, SO number will not appear. Once PGI is done against to this delivery document. Then the line item from MD04 will be deleted. To recovery / delete the inconsistent entries, you can run the prog: SDRQCR21 It makes sense as well that for 01, the orders on the same day are summarized. Your understanding is perfectly right. This is the reason, why you can't see the SO number in MD04 for Materials which has AC:01. In MD04- line appears as summarized requirement for the whole day, it could consist all the SO numbers on that day. So you can¶t see the SO number in this case. To check the Availability Check rules for existing sales order (VBBE), do the following: 1. Go to the sales order. 2. Select particular line item. 3. Click on Display availability button at the bottom 4. You shall get the availability screen. 5. ON the top , click on SCOPE OF CHECK 6. You shall see that on top left section, there are two fields A) Availability Check ( eg 01, 02 etc) B) Checking rule ( A , B etc ) Your focus should be on Availability Check. If it is 02, it indicates Individual Requirement. If your availability check option is 01, it means table VBBS shall be updated with Daily ( total records / requirements )

Availability Check had been changed to "02".If your availability check option is 02. Define partner determination procedure: IMG -> SD -> Basic Functions -> Partner Determination -> Setup Partner Determination -> Partner Determination For Sales Doc Header Click on Partner Type Go To New Entries and Define Partner Types Customer KU Vendor LI Contact Person AP Sales Employ SE Select Partner Type KU and Go To Details Icon and Maintain Partner Functions SP Sold To Party SH Ship To Party BP Bill To Party PY Payer Come Back and Click On Assign Partner Type To Sales Doc Header KU To TA Assign Partner Functions To Account Group . New sales order or new item line in the same sales order with the materials will work after MM . it will still shows blank as the system only copied the MRP Settings once. By: Micro Irrigation First determine one account group ( Trans code OBD2 ) assign number range for acct group ( Trans code OBAR ). then ideally table VBBE should have been updated for that sales order PS: For existing sales order that were already created. Partner Determination For Sales Doc Explain me how to get partner determination for sales doc header level.MRP View 3 .

3) Contact Person (AP) Partner Functions-CP. Sh. For Sales Doc Header The Partner Functions Can Be Determined From Customer Master. A) Partner Types. Delivery. In the business one specifies partner is authorized to enter and to release contracts. . 2) Vendor(LI) Partner Functions (FA. Bp. 4) Sales Employee(PE) Partner Funcitons-SE Authorized Partner to release the order Contracts are release by raising sales orders.SP To ACC GROUP SH BP PY Same. Setup Partner Determination Procedure How to customize the Partner Determination Procedure? We can determine partner determination procedure by using the transaction code VOPA. In the business different people interacts to make a transaction with the business while making transactions with the business every partner performs certain roles those are called as a partner functions.Forward Agent). Sales. 1) Customer(KU) He performs partner functions like Sp. Flow: Customer master. Billing. Depending on the partner type every partner fulfill certain mandatory partner functions. Document header and items. Py. SAP determines relevant partner functions automatically to relevant partner object type.

ship to party to release the contracts and this partner functions assigned to partner determination procedure (kab). For sales document.At Header level( sales document) there is a control by which system carries out checks against partner whether he is authorized to release the contract. Aw.credit representations both belongs to partner type pe(personal) Configurations settings: 1) Define Account Group( OBD2) 2) Assign Number range key to Account Group (OBAR) 3) Define partner determination procedure for customer master. d) Assign partner determination determination procedure to account group. e) Assign partner functions to account group. kb. Partner type(KU) and Partner Functions( AA. a) Define Partner functions to sales document header . c) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure. Partners to check credit limits: We define partner functions Km-credit Manager. Click on partner function control button under dialog structure Partner Function Name Partner type error sp sold to party ku 07 sh ship to party ku 07 bp bill to party ku 07 py payer ku 07 partner type Pe Km credit manager pe kb credit represent pe 09 09 b) Define partner determination procedure.Sold T party) to release the contracts. a) Define partner functions Path: Img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> set up partner determination -> set up partner determination for customer master.

1) Define partner functions img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> setup partner determination > set up partner determination for sales document header 2) Define partner determination procedure. There are two ways to process a bill of materials in Sales. and so on. wheels. the system runs pricing. the system displays the material that describes the whole bill of materials as a main item. the saddle. and delivery processing at: .Component level if the material is not assembled The type of processing used by the system is determined by the item category group that you enter in the material master record for relevant materials. inventory control. Process Flow When you enter the material number of a bill of materials that is relevant for sales order processing. The following graphic shows how a bill of material is processed at main item level. . A BOM for a bicycle. for example. or . The individual components are displayed as lower-level items. Processing at Main Item Level If you want the system to carry out pricing. 3) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure 4) Partner Determination procedure assignment. enter ERLA in the Item category group field of theSales: sales org. consists of all the parts that make up the bicycle: the frame. and delivery processing at main item level. inventory control. Sales BOM Implementation A bill of material (BOM) describes the different components that together create a product. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product. This means that the components only function as text items and are not relevant for delivery.Main item level if the material is assembled. Once you have entered a bill of material in a sales order.

If it doesn't then your BOM isn't working. The latest delivery date among all the components becomes the delivery date for the entire delivery group. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product. The bom hasn't been defined for the plant used.Processing at Component Level If you want the system to carry out pricing. Main item category . and delivery processing at the component level. BOM usage '5')? 6. what's the 'Structure scope' set as? Anything except C may be useful here? We have that set to A. You could set it to B if BOM are configured multi-level. Fast Links: .has BOM application SD01 been assigned to it? 3. Those are probably main reasons why BOM shouldn't work. Has the BOM itself been configured properly (i. In this case. How to Know that Sales BOM is working or not? I have set up a sales BOM. How do I know or test that is is working or not? Once you enter a material (for whch you have created a BOM thru CS01) in the sales doc another material pops under the main material line item as a sub-item (s). Sales items maintenance . or you haven't defined the plant in SO. right plant. inventory control. A number of things to check is: 1. Are you trying it out on an order created after all BOM maintenance was done? 7. 4. since our BOMs are all single-level. enter LUMF in the Item category group field of theSales: sales org. Also . During processing the system automatically creates a delivery group. Item categories for main items and sub-items have not been mainteined properly. In my experience BOMs work if all maintenance has been done properly. just recheck your whole config .the truth is out there somwhere.You should assign item categories for BOM header items and sub-items to a specific sales doc. 5.e. 2. Apart from that. only the components are relevant for delivery.

Material: Specify the material for which components are to be maintained.Material BOM CS01 create Specify the data for the following fields.Bills of material . Creating BOM item: .Master data . Plant: Specify the plant of BOM item. BOM usage: Specify the application in which BOM is maintained (5 for SD). (L = stock item N = Non-stock item) In the overview screen specify the components which makes the main item and the corresponding quantities and save it.Sales and distribution . Alternative BOM: Specifies the sequence of a BOM within a group of BOMs. .Products . 1) For the BOM to be exploded in the sales document the following customizing setting is required.What Is BOM Referring to SAP SD What is bill of material? By: Mike BILL OF MATERIALS We need to maintain Material master records for the BOM Item and for the components also. The item category group of the BOM items is µERLA/LUMF¶ and the item category is µNORM¶.Logistics . Note: During sales document processing if we enter the BOM item the system automatically determines corresponding components.

For this the following customizing setting is required. which is relevant for pricing. B) The item category of the components is TAN which is relevant for pricing. While creating sales document to get the list of alternative BOMs in the definition item category of BOM item we have to check the field ³Manual Alternative´ 24-07-2007 ITEM CATEGORY DETERMINATION FOR BOM ITEM SD type OR OR OR OR OR OR OR NOTE: ITCaGr ERLA NORM LUMF NORM NORM NORM NORM Usg HLItCa TAQ TAE TAP TAN TAN TAE TAE DftItCa TAQ TAP TAE TAN A ± Explode single level BOM item B ± Explode multi level BOM item . B) The item category of components is TAE which is not relevant for pricing. B) If the item category group is LUMF the item category of the BOM item is TAP in the definition of which we have to specify the value A in the field structure scope. in the definition of which we have to specify the value A (Explode single level BOM) in the structure scope. so the components are not priced. so the BOM item is not Priced. so the components are priced 3) If the item category group is ERLA the system shows price for the BOM item but not for components. A) The item category of BOM item is TAQ. 2) If the item category group is LUMF the system shows price for the components but not for the BOM item. For this following customizing setting is required. so the BOM is priced. A) The item category of the BOM item is TAP which is not relevant for pricing.A) If the item category group is ERLA the item category of the BOM is TAQ.

if the customer asks for a certain combinationa of Material A. and C and give their respective quantities. The item category for the header item will be TAP and the item cateory for the items will be TAN. When processing the sales order. Then create a sales BOM using Tcode CS01 and enter the following details: Material : Material D Plant : Plant in which you created the material. and price it at header level or sub level. and C. Before you have to create pricing condition records for Materials A.CS01 ± Transaction code for creating BOM Item Statistical value µx¶ or µy¶ Make TAP relevant for pricing but values for statistical only. In this cas the Material D is called as the higher level Item . For eg. B. B. then you create a Material Master record Material D with item category group as LUMF. If you want to assemble the products and depending upon the assemblies you want to price. . This is used when you dont know what quantities of assemblies the customer is going to order and if the price of the assembly keeps varies. and all the assemblies are called as the sub items. Here the subitems are relevant for pricing and delivery where as the header item is not relevant for neither pricing nor delivery. This type of configaration of BOM is known as pricing at item level. ricing Customization For Sales BOM What are the steps of customization to pricing for header level or item level then? By: John You can create a sales bom. B and C respectively. B and C are created with standared item category groups NORM only. BOM Usage : 5 (Sales and Distribution) then give the Materials A. Then configure the item categories ( T . It just acts as a text item. While the Materials A.code : VOV4). just give the Material D and the system will pick up the corresponding assemblies for that material and populate in the order.

Where the header item is relevant for pricing and delivery.There is another way of configaring BOM which is pricing at header level. The difference is that the Material Master D has to be confugured using the item category group ERLA. and subitems are not relevant for neither the pricing nor the delivery. The item categories in this case would be Header item : TAQ Sub item TAE. BOM Usage as '5' (Sales and Distribution) ***Then proceed with enter system will take you the BOM detail screen here you maintain the details of the components (How many components you need to make a Header material) -->Check the item category determinetion settings in the transaction VOV4. -->To create Sales BOM go to the transaction CS01 there you give enter the data Header Material which you have created in the MM01 transaction. In Summary: -->Befor going to create sales BOM you need to create: Master data for that Header Material and Components in the MM01 transaction. Creation of BOM is same. -->If you want pricing at item level you create header material with LUMF Itemcategory group. But you need to maintain the pricing condition record for the header item. Delivering Plant. -->If you want Header price you create Header Materil with ERLA Itemcategory group. -->Now you can create sales order with the BOM material . -->Maintain the Pricing procedure according to that. Depending upon your requirement you configure accordingly.

A sale order is created and when saved a PR is generated at the background 5. The company raises PO to the vendor. Assign Item Category TAS to Order type that you are going to use.Process Flow for 3rd Party Sales Customize the third party sales in summary: 1.Seema Dhar SD . 10. 3. Item category group as "BANS". 4. With reference to SO a PO is created (ME21N). Vendor delivers the goods and raises bill to company. therefore. there is no delivery process attached in the whole process of Third party sales. distr chnl. div Enter Sold to PO # Material Quantity Enter Save . 6. The item cat TAS or Schedule line cat CS is not relevant for delivery which is evident from the config and. MM receives the invoice MIRO 7. Billing *-. Create Material ± Material Type as "Trading Goods". Goods receipt MIGO 8. Create Vendor XK01 2.3rd party sales order Create Sales Order VA01 Order Type Sales org. Goods issue 9.

3rd party sales order Create Invoice MIRO Invoice Date Look for the PO . just in case Post Save SD .3rd party sales order View the PR that is created ME52N Key in the PR number Save SD . enter Drag the PR and drop in the shopping basket Save SD .SD .3rd party sales order Receive Goods MIGO_GR PO Number DN Number Batch tab .3rd party sales order View the PR that is created with a third party sales order VA01 Order Number Goto Item Overview Item ->Schedule Item SD . state the vendor and the Material Check the box . click on classification Serial Numbers tab Date of Production Flag Item OK Check.3rd party sales order Assign the PR to the vendor and create PO ME57 Key in the PR number Toggle the "Assigned Purchase Requisition" Execute Check the box next to the material Assign Automatically button Click on "Assignments" button Click on "Process assignment" The "Process Assignment Create PO" box .

go to the menu Sales Document . (2) While creating individual order I face one error 'Plant not assigned to Controlling Area': How to configure controlling area and menu path.3rd party sales order Create a delivery order VL01N In the order screen . Ex: If the customer placed for the order for computer then computer stand can be suggested as a combination material. When the user raises the sales order and specifies ordered material then system automatically pup-up a box in which system displays suggested material Configuration settings: . (3) Menu of path of subsequent Delivery Free of Charge. select "Deliver" Go to "picking" tab State the qty and save SD .3rd party sales order Create a billing document VF01 Ensure that the delivery document is correct in the Enter Go to edit -> Log Save Cross Selling : How To Configure (1) Cross Selling: How to configure and the menu path details. It can be mapped by using cross selling concept that uses condition technique. By using this concept the business can offer combination material for ordered material. By : Ahmednsp Cross selling is a concept by which the business can improve the sales.Clilck on "Copy" Purchase Order Number (bottom half of the screen) Amount State the baseline date Simulate & Post Invoice Number *Invoice blocked due to date variance SD .

Specify cross selling pricing procedure (CS0001) .IMG . specify cross selling profile key with description . c) Define condition type: Here we define condition type C001 and assign it to access sequence C001 that we define in previous step. d) Maintain procedure: Go to new entries and define cross selling profile Ex: CS0001 and assign our condition type C001 that we define in the previous step.SD .Assign the pricing procedure (RVA001) .Define determination procedure for cross selling a) Create condition table: Here we define condition table ex: . 2) Maintain customer/document procedures for cross selling: a) Define customer procedure for cross selling: Here we define customer cross selling profile Ex: "B" -.Cross selling .Specify cross selling dialog box indicator W .cross selling b) Define documents procedure for cross selling: Here we define document cross selling procedure ex: `B".Basic function .1) Define determination procedure for cross selling: Path: .material b) Maintain access sequence: Here we define access sequence ex: C001 and assign condition table ex:011 that we define in previous step.cross selling c) Assign document procedure for cross selling to sales document: Choose sales document type "OR" and assign document cross selling procedure ex: "B" 3) Define and assign cross selling profile: a) Define cross selling profile: Go to new entries.

select condition line item Click on alternative material icon and maintain alternative material with cross selling delivery conditions options Blank ± Out bond delivery takes place regardless of main item "A" -. b) Assign cross selling profile: .Master data .Assign cross selling profile -.CS0001 Maintain condition record for cross selling (VB41): Path: .Specify customer cross selling procedure ±B .If it is "A" ± dialog box appears only in request. specify sales area .Cross selling . raise the sales order with order material check the effect.Logistics . system carry out ATP check for cross selling product. here you can create controlling area An Example Of Third Party Sales .SD . sales area section of sales tab Assign customer procedure for product proposal .VB41 Specify condition type C001 Specify the order material.Specify document cross selling procedure ± B .Go to new entries.Out bond delivery only if main item has been partially delivered Go to VD02. 4) Path to created controlling area: Img-->Ent Str-->Defintio-->Controlling-->Maintain Controlling Area . It is blank ± dialog box appears in request and after date is released Check cross selling ATP indicator: If you check it .Products .B Save it and exit Go to VA01.

The schedule line category is CS. Singapore is not able to produce the same. item category & schedule line category. After processing India ships the material directly to the customer along with necessary documentation. 5) Singapore company does the invoice verification in MM using tcode MIRO. The procurement type should be marked as external procurement (F) in MRP 2 view of the material master record. 6) Singapore company raises the invoice to the singapore customer.India & Singapore Customer places sales order for particular material on Singapore. item category TAS is used for this. Here you can see a field 'order type' with value 'NB'. How can the above scenario handled? By: Balaji You can do this using third party sales. This is converted into PO (purchase order) and sent to the indan company. 2) Because of the configuration settings of the sales document type.Scenario: 2 companies are created in system . Final Commercial Invoice will be raised by Singapore. In standard SAP. Invoice copy is passed on to Singapore. The third party sales process is as under. 1) Singapore company creates an order for the singapore customer. 3) Indian company supplies the material directly to the singapore customer. They pass on the order to India for processing. 2) If you are not always allowing third party order processing then you can create a material master record with item category group as NORM and the procurement type should be marked as (X) meaning both types of procurement (in house manufacturing . as soon as the order is saved a PR (purchase requisition) is automatically generated. 1) If you are always following a third party process for a material then you have to create the material using item category group BANS. 4) Indian company sends the invoice to the singapore company. Plus in the material master also you need to do certain settings. This triggers the automatic creation of the PR.

S060 rebate processing and S009/14 sales support). . the standard shipment also includes information structures that are used internally (S066/67 Credit Management. It shows only a latest created invoice details. But it is not showing all the invoices which I done in a day. the following information structures are available in the Sales Information System: y y y y y y S001 "Customer" S002 "Sales office" S003 "Sales organization" S004 "Material" S005 "Shipping point" S006 "Sales employee " These information structures form the data basis for the respective standard analysis of the same name. In the standard system. In addition to the above information structures. What is the Difference/Similarities between LIS and SIS The Logistics Information System (LIS) is made up of the following information systems: y y y y y y y y Sales Information System Purchasing Information System Inventory Controlling Shop Floor Information System Plant Maintenance Information System Quality Management Information System Retail Information System (RIS) Transport Information System (TIS) Out of this SIS (sales information system ) is one.and external procurement). In the item category the billing relevance should be 'F'. I am trying to see the standard analysis for the customer in MCTA transaction.

MRP works semi-separately. T-code MCVV will allow you to simulate how a single invoice would update all SIS structures. SAP first backward schedules looking at the required delivery date. Create new invoices and run MCTA again. usually just a pricing quote. depending upon how PP and MRP is set up. different planned orders. or give you a date based on the production time or purchasing time from the material master. the first availability check is carried out. MRP looks at the demand on the plant. less transportation time. less production/purchase time if applicable.S999 in the customer namespace then MCSI to execute any custom reports. SAP will then forward schedule for today¶s date. You would need to create a custom SIS structure and add the invoice as a characteristic. it will create a purchase requisition (outside purchase) or requirement or . ATP is the single most complex part of the SD module. deliveries etc already created against that material in that plant (and possibly Storage location). and if it the stock does not meet expected sales orders and deliveries. the system will give you a confirmed date. When it is converted to an order. then it will confirm the customer¶s required date. Availability Check on Quotation SAP standard does not do an availability check on the quotation.MCTA is reading data in table S001. Run MC22 and re-generate your info-structure (make sure you play with S001). If the date it calculates is equal or later than today¶s date. The system will check stock in the plant. which will not give invoice details as this is a summation of data based on the billing date. less pick and pack time. Basically. plus what is contained in the availability checking rule (scope of check) eg: can add POs for replenishment. depending on how it is set up. and subtract sales orders. as well as credit checks. as it is not a definite order. If it falls in the past. If there is enough stock in the plant/SLoc. less transportation lead time. The date the system proposes is based on the customer's requested delivery date. Use S600 . purchase reqs. plus the times listed above to get the date when the customer can actually have it.

. We thought the worse case is to create a ABAP which is linked to the "requirement" field in the Procedure (OV13). the following info. When MRP is started. In order to combat the problem. is available: Product selection in the background is performed on the basis of the availability check. We want to have the material determination only in case on material shortage. the first product substitution should be for the original material. SD material Determination based on availability check For SD material Determination you can create a Substitution reason and on the Strategy field. Has anyone had the same requirement? Is this a bug or just incorrectly documented? I also encountered this abnormally recently using material determination. structure the Material Determination record as follows: Material Entered: ABC Substitutes: ABC DEF XYZ There seems to be a devaition at availability check and or on a conceptual note still. it will turn the PR into a PO or the requirement into a production order.planned order (for production) to cover the shortfall. We expect the Substitution reason to give us this functionallity. Availability check can be configured both at requiremnt class and at the schedule line categories level. I've illustrated this below: Original Product: ABC Substitutes: DEF. XYZ In order to perform product substitution ONLY in the case of ATP failure for product ABC. It does not hovever take the availabilty into account before substitution.

save.maintaining procedures for material determination and assigning procedures to sales doc. types have been done) Create one material determination. Reqmnt type must exist by which a requiremnt class can be found 3. This can be done through substituiton reason T Code [OVRQ] See the substitution reason number for Manual Material Selection .check the Warning box . 2.select A for Stategy .It is possible to get a list of materials for substituiton. Click the Variants Icon on top left-Sreen opens .Whilst the availabilty check at the requirement class level via global and mandatory configuration the schedule line catgry availability check deals with the order.but remember you can substitue only one material from the list. The following are the mandatory for Availability check to happen-1.e.dont forget to give the Subst reason on top and also on the line.check the Entry box . Go To VB11 to create Material Determination (taking into consideration that all the previous steps for material determiantion i. Creating Multiple Materials in Material Determination Material Determination is used to swap one material for another. It is mandatory that the reqmnt class is flagged off for avlblty check and the schdelu line cat need not be.Checking group must be defined in Material Master records(it controls whthr the system is to create individual or collective reqmnt) A combination of checking gropup and checking rule will determine the scope of availbaility check. There must exist a plant and is defined 4. Must be swithced on at the requirment class level and at the schedule line level. maintaining condition types.

taking into consideration the working days of the shipping point and a rounding profile. Backward and Forward Scheduling Backward scheduling is the calculation of deadline dates: the arrival time at the customer site is calculated as the earliest possible goods receipt time at the customers unloading point on the requested delivery date. It is activated by maintaining the working hours for a particular shipping point. The system calculates backward scheduling as follows: Requested delivery date minus transit time = Goods issue date Goods issue date minus loading time = Loading date Loading date minus transportation lead time = Transportation scheduling date Loading date minus pick/pack time = Material availability date By default. This is referred to as daily scheduling. Backward scheduling is always carried out first. All four of the delivery and transportation scheduling lead times are subtracted from the customer's requested delivery date to determine if this date can be met. Forward scheduling is also done if no product is available on the material availability date calculated by backward scheduling. This new material availability date forms the starting point for scheduling the remaining activities. In this case the system assumes a 24 hour work day and lead times can be entered in days up to 2 decimal points. The system does an availability check to determine the first possible date when product will be available. the system must then use forward scheduling. the system will calculate delivery dates the closest day. and pick/pack time are subtracted from the customer¶s requested delivery date to calculate the required material availability date. This allows the scheduling of a delivery within a single day.atleast Divisions should be same.Specify different materials you want to swap with the material you have enterd Note that the subst reason is already copied on the screen Remember materials should be of the same sales area. The transit time. The . loading time. If the material availability date or transportation scheduling date is calculated to be in the past. Precise scheduling calculated down to the day. hour and minute is supported.

The checking group + checking rule determine how the availability check is to be performed. transit time.e. A requirements type must exist by which the requirements class can be found. In Sales and Distribution. You can access (MD04) order. pick/pack time. The checking rule. and transportation lead time are added to the new material availability date to calculate the confirmed delivery date. Briefly explaining the above ± checking group determines which type of requirement to be passed on to MRP whether it be individual or summarized and checking rule which is at the transaction level and can be configured independently for each application module. which stocks. 3. The checking rule applies to how the availability check is to be carried out at the transaction level. determines the scope of the availability check for every business operation. The system automatically uses individual requirements in case of special stock items. The Availability check must be set at the schedule line level. 7. the checking rule is specified internally within the system and cannot be changed. *-. 5. . Note that you must define checking rules for each individual application such as for production orders for example.loading time. line and schedule line individually which gives a greater control on available stock and requirements placed on stock. in conjunction with the checking group. 2. receipts and issues to be taken into account. that is. summarized requirements (daily/weekly) or individual requirements for each sales order. The checking group determines whether and how the system checks the stock availability and generates requirements for material planning.Manoj Mahajan Configuring Availability Check Through Checking Groups 1. The checking group defines what type of requirements will be passed on i. 4. Advantages of individual processing over summarized processing ± Backorder processing is possible. receipts and issues are to be included in the availability check and whether the check is to be carried out with or without the replenishment lead time. Required data for the Availability check to be carried out ± The Availability check must be switched on at the requirement class level. For performing an availability check checking group has to work in conjunction with checking rule. 6. determines which stocks.

C) Create orders for the material. 9. b) Create purchase orders for the material. depending on material type and plant.A plant must be defined in the sales order for each schedule line item (in other words plant must be defined for every material in MMR). two users can confirm the same material at the same time for two different orders. These settings are based on the checking group that is assigned to the material master record and the checking rule that is predefined and assigned to the sales and distribution transaction. Configuring Availability check and defining Checking Groups ± Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. If an entry exists. you tell the system what stock on hand and what inward and outward movements of stock it must take into account when performing the availability check in addition to whether or not to consider the replenishment lead time. Defining default values for checking groups . 11. 10.Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. This default value will be used by the system depending on the material type mentioned in MMR and plant in sales order. . Total sales and total deliveries columns are there to configure a checking rule to sum up requirements to post to MRP either individually or by day or week. SAP standard checking groups are 01 ± summarized requirements and 02 ± individual requirements or you can create your own by copying the standard ones. not knowing if the stock is available or not. Controlling Availability Check ± in this section. The no check indicator is CHECKED when you DO NOT want the system to carry out ATP check. Block quantity required can be set if you want several users to be able to process the material simultaneously in different transactions without blocking each other. a default value can be set here. Defining material block for other users ± the block check box is an indicator that enables you to block material master records of a particular material during the availability check and restrict other users from accessing same master record and reserve the material. If you select this field. A checking group must be defined in the material master record in the MRP3 screen in the availability check field. the material is blocked during the availability check and other users cannot: a) Make changes in the material master record. this default value is over written by MMR. If the block is not set. 8. 12. However if there is no entry present in the material master record for the checking group.

a confirmed purchase order ± is a good indicator of receiving stock on a specified date. You create a reservation for a particular storage location. It is used to switch off the check at storage location level. Should you not want the system to automatically check RLT. A shipping notification on the other hand .13.Material .Backorder Processing (rescheduling program SAPMV75B) V_V2 . 17. the system carries out the check at plant level only and does not take the storage location into account that is specified in the reservation. the scope of the availability check is set in such a way as to exclude the storage location. It is always recommended not to select the shipping notifications for the delivery requirements type as you may not actually receive the stock into plant or warehouse for which you are creating a delivery.Back order Processing (rescheduling program SAPLATP4) V_RA . but a few tips are given under ± When controlling the Availability check at the time of the sales order. Back Order Processing Using CO06 and V_V2 What are the difference between CO06 and V_V2 ? Both seem to be backorder rescheduling transactions.Execute Rescheduling/ Rescheduling Sales and Stock Transfer Documents: by material . Defining the elements in the availability check entirely depends on the business needs. 15. RLT is the time taken for a material to become available. yet at the time of the delivery only include physical stock on hand waiting to be shipped. This indicator is used to set the scope of the availability check. 16. It is only used when doing an ATP check and is taken from MMR.SD Document . However. a purchase requisition does not necessarily indicate by it is going to come into the plant. This is due to the fact that you may want to include specific stock or incoming stock for the sales order. 14. you may indicate so here. In this case. It is possible to indicate to the system that you would like the availability check NOT TO CHECK the stock at the storage location level. CO06 . These settings carry out control both for sales order and delivery as well.

any restrict condition if I want to change it? Run the report SDRQCR21 for the said material/plant and then check if its confirmation from CO09 goes out or not. I selected the blue line . I'm using service material. "Purchase requisition with delivery scheduling" is not checked and still the quantity is not confirmed on the sales order date (todays date). CO06 confirmed qty can't be change I want to change the confirmed qty in orders and use tcode CO06. To solve your issue: T. In Tab: Shipping. This report is basically is run in case of inconsistency of stock.Create a sales order with todays date: 29-09-2009 . STO's etc then that stock can be released via this report.. Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. removal of confirmation of stock and if some stock is blocked under some unwanted processes like old SO's. can someone tell me why the confirmed qty can't be changed. Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality).The rescheduling program (SDV03V02) behind the V_V2.Schedule line: quantity confirmed on todays date 29-09-2009 But my quantity is confirmed for the next day. deliveries.. but it prompt " please select a line that can be changed". Confirm quantity in schedule line I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). type and Double-Click. What I need is: . .

remove it. If it is mentioned any days.) This type of check is performed dynamically for each transaction with or without replenishment lead time (RLT). See The Scope of ATP Check How to see the scope of ATP check? When we creat a sales order. planned orders. The planned inward movements of stocks (purchase orders. T. Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. delivery documents. Types of availability check: There are 3 types of availability checks in sales document processing: 1. 4. etc) and The planned out ward movements of stock (Sales orders. Check on the basis of ATP quantities (Available To Promise) 2. etc.Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1. . Check against Product Allocation 3. for the required delivery date if the goods are available for all the necessary processing activities which take place before delivery. Check on the basis of ATP Quantities The ATP quantity is calculated from the ware house stock. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . production orders. T. Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value. 2. Check against planning. 3. It should have been blank. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields In-House production and GR Processing Time. we can only confirm the delivery of goods. T.

RLT : It is the time that is needed to order or produce the requested material, the system determines the RLT according to specific times maintained in the material master record. Depending on the material type RLT can be calculated according to various time periods. For ex: In the case of trading goods it is determined according to the planned delivery time, purchase processing time and the goods receipt processing time. Availability check including RLT: Availability is checked up to the end of Replenishment Lead Time. If the material availability data is calculated on the basis of current date to lie after the RLT, item it self can be confirmed despite insufficient stock being available. In this case the system assumes that any quantity requested by the customer can be procured by the material availability date and consider the goods to be available. Controlling availability check in sales document processing. We need to customize SD Specific settings and General Settings General Control Features: The following control elements need to be maintained in customizing and in the material master record. 1. Strategy group: The allowed planning strategies i.e. the main strategy and further possible strategies are combined in a strategy group. It is specified in the Material Master Record in MRP3 view. Note: In customizing, the strategy groups are assigned to MRP groups depending on the Plant so that the strategy group is automatically proposed in the Material Master. 2. MRP group: The MRP group combines the material from the point of material requirements planning which is specified on the MRP1 view in the Material Master Data. SD Specific Control Features: 1. Requirements class: It controls all control features for planning and is also specifies whether the availability check is to take place for materials in the SD documents on the basis of ATP quantities and whether the requirements are to be passed on. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions

Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define procedure by requirement class Checking groups: Checking group controls whether the system is to create individual or collective requirements in sales and shipping process. In addition a material block for the availability check with transfer of requirements can be set here. The checking group can also be used to deactivate the availability check. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups Checking rule: We use the checking rule to control the scope of availability check for each transaction the SD process. Checking rule in the combination of checking group determines the scope of availability check Creating checking rule SPRO Material management Purchasing Purchase order Set up stock transport order Create checking rule Scope of availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check

Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Carry out control for availability check Go to New Entries and define the scope of check in the combination of checking group and checking rule. The following elements can be involved in the availability check STOCKS: []Include safety stocks: Minimum stock at plant/ware house []Stock in transfer []Include quality inspection stock []Include Inward movement Out ward movement Purchase orders Sales requirements Purchase requisitions Deliveries Planned orders Release orders etc. Production orders If we do not check the field [] µcheck without RLT¶ the system considers RLT while checking the availability of the material Note: Blocking the material for availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define material block for other users If we check the field Block [] during the availability check of a material the users cannot make changes in the Material Master, cannot create PO, cannot create sales orders. Note: During the Material Master creation the system automatically proposes the checking group. Further the following setting is required. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions

Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups default values. We need to assign the checking group to the combination of material type and plant.

ettlement Downpayment with Installment payment Term
Scenario :- Problem with Down payment settlement using installment payment term. 1. When we create Sales order, (sales item value = 100) use payment term : 0009 (Installment Payment term, 30%, 40%, 30%). In the Billing Plan, I specify 2 records, 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value, billing type is FAZ . the 2nd record is Final invoice 100%, billing type is F2. 2. Create Billing type Down payment request , it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. 3. Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen , at this stage the asccounting document is created as following Dr. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. Advance from customer 30 4. When I create Billing document for the sales item, the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation, I then accept the default value of down payment clearing. The accounting document is as below Dr. AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. Sales 100 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 9 (DP. 30% * 30) Cr AR 12 (DP. 30% * 40) Cr AR 9 (DP. 30% * 30) It seems SAP settlement Down payment by Installment Payment term. I was wondering that is there are alternative or an option to setup the Down payment settlement independent of Installment term. I meant, I don't want to have the last 3 Credit item as above, I want only 1 line item of credit, the accounting should be

Dr. AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. Sales 100 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 30 (Not separate by Installment payment term) Solutions : Suggesstions on how I could proceed? Your problem with Down payment settlement is common. Many users object to the down payment or security lodgement mechanism. In our case we often park and apply the advance manually to final invoice. However, following the above case we sometimes use this with our PS orders: 1. Create Sales order, (sales item value = 100) with billing plan with three steps 30% down payment,30% std billiing on order completion and 70% on delivery. A little different to your original Billing Plan, but 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value, billing type is FAZ . the 2nd & 3rd records are std F2 invoices 30% ,70%. 2. Create Billing type Down payment request , it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. 3. Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen , at this stage the accounting document is created as following :Dr. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. Security deposit payment 30 ( In many countries this may be subject to TAX laws) 4. Create the First Billing documents , the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation, then accept the default value of down payment clearing as these equal each other. The accounting document is as below Dr. AR 30 Cr. Sales 30 Dr. Advance from customer 30 Cr. AR 30 5. Create the Second Billing document ( down payment value has expired and will not be proposed) The accounting

Session Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- .Batch Input for Uploading Condition Pricing After executing the program.6x Require flat file :ROW 1 BGR00 ROW 2 BKOND1 ROW 3 BKOND2 .with scale ROW 6 BKOND2 . Sales and Distribution .no scale ROW 4 BKOND2 . AR 60 Cr.no scale Sample flat file for uploading table A305 . Envirionment : 4.document is as below is then standard for the last installement.Upload Condition Pricing RV14BTCI . Dr.Customer/Material with release status :0BIPRICE 123SAPABAP X 1VK15 A305V PR00 2ALL 990000123456SAP8204142100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 2ALL 990000123456SAP8217168100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 3 100PC 2 3 200PC 1 2ALL 990000123456SAP8220133910 There a total of 4 flat file format :BGR00 . Sales 60 This alternative provides a cleaner option with the Downpayment. you have to use SM35 to process the update program.no scale ROW 5 BKOND3 .

| Field name | Description Length | Dec. | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | GROUP | Group name 000012 | 000000 | | MANDT | Client 000003 | 000000 | | USNAM | User ID 000012 | 000000 | | START | Lock until: 000010 | 000000 | | XKEEP | Keep indicator 000001 | 000000 | | NODATA | No batch input 000001 | 000000 | | 0 | BI Session Name | Your client no | Queue user ID | Queue start date | CHAR | CHAR | CLNT | CHAR | DATS | | | | | | X . 305 | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | | | | . | | Report header | Cat. | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | TCODE | Transaction code 000020 | 000000 | | KVEWE | Usage 000001 | 000000 | | KOTABNR | Table 000003 | 000000 | | 1 | TCode = VK15 | U | Table e.don't delete SESS| CHAR | / | CHAR | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND1 .g. | | Report header | Cat.Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description Length | Dec.

Main Data Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | Field name | Description Length | Dec. | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | VAKEY | VarKey 000100 | 000000 | | DATBI | Valid to 000010 | 000000 | | DATAB | Valid on 000010 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | KONWA | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | KPEIN | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | KMEIN | 000003 | 000000 | | MWSK1 | Tax code 000002 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM 000003 | 000000 | | 2 | VarKey | Valid to | Valid on | Amount | R2tab | R2tab | | CHAR | CHAR | DATS | DATS | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | | | | | | | | | Tx | UoM | | .g V | CHAR | CHAR | | CTyp e. | | Report header | Cat.g PR00 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND2 .| KAPPL | Application 000002 | 000000 | | KSCHL | Condition type 000004 | 000000 | | App e.

| MXWRT | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | GKWRT | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | STFKZ | Scale type 000001 | 000000 | | KZNEP | Exclusion 000001 | 000000 | | LOEVM_KO | Deletion indic. 000001 | 000000 | | SKONWA | R/2 table 000005 | 000000 | | Amount | Amount | S | CndEx | D | R2tab | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | | | | | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND3 . | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type 000001 | 000000 | | KSTBM | Quantity 000018 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM 000003 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount 000015 | 000000 | | 3 | Quantity | UoM | Amount | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | CHAR | | | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Sales Order Changed History Display * * Sales Order Changed History Display * * You can execute the report by : . | | Report header | Cat.Scale Data Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description Length | Dec.

XNAME FOR ICDHDR-USERNAME. R1. ITEXT(16) VALUE 'has been created'. SELECT-OPTIONS: XUDATE FOR ICDHDR-UDATE. WDEC2 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. SELECTION-SCREEN SKIP. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW. Change Date * 2. WCHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR.com * REPORT ZSDCHANGE LINE-SIZE 132 NO STANDARD PAGE HEADING LINE-COUNT 065(001) MESSAGE-ID VR. WUDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. T685T. DATA: END OF ICDSHW. KONVC. . TABLES: DD04T. DATA: WFLAG. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDHDR.* 1. R1. VBUK. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK BLK1 PARAMETERS: SUDATE RADIOBUTTON GROUP SNAME RADIOBUTTON GROUP SOBID RADIOBUTTON GROUP SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK BLK1. R1. DATA: END OF ICDHDR. WDEC4 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. WITH FRAME TITLE TEXT-001. CDHDR. WVBELN LIKE VBUK-VBELN. Sales Order Number * * Submitted by : SAP Basis. WDEC3 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDSHW OCCURS 50.sap-img. DD03L. XVBELN FOR VBUK-VBELN. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW. DATA: UTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been changed'. TPART. DTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been deleted'. DD41V. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDHDR OCCURS 50. CDPOS. User Name * 3. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff * http://www. VBPA. WNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. DATA: BEGIN OF ITAB OCCURS 10. WDEC1 TYPE P DECIMALS 3.

CLEAR CDHDR. ELSE. VBELN(10). MODIFY ITAB. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO KONVC. INDTEXT(200). ELSEIF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'U'. REPLACE '%' WITH UTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. IF SY-SUBRC = 0.DATA: UDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. . ETENR(4). ENDIF. WHEN 'KONVC'. REPLACE '&' WITH 'Item' INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. CLEAR CDPOS. CASE ITAB-TABNAME. CDHDR-OBJECTID = VBUK-VBELN. REPLACE '%' WITH DTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. SELECT SINGLE * FROM T685T WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND KVEWE = 'A' AND KAPPL = 'V' AND KSCHL = KONVC-KSCHL. SELECT * FROM VBUK WHERE VBELN IN XVBELN. USERNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. REPLACE '&' WITH TPART-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO VBPA. IF ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. IF SY-SUBRC = 0. ENDIF. CONDENSE ITAB-INDTEXT. ENDIF. REPLACE '%' WITH ITEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. ENDIF. LOOP AT ITAB. ENDIF. CHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR. PERFORM READPOS. WHEN 'VBPA'. WHEN 'VBAP'. ENDCASE. IF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'I'. END OF ITAB. IF ITAB-FNAME = 'KUNNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'LIFNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PARNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PERNR' OR ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. IF ITAB-INDTEXT(1) EQ '&'. REPLACE '&' WITH ITAB-FTEXT(40) INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS = 'VERKBELEG'. SELECT SINGLE * FROM TPART WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND PARVW = VBPA-PARVW. POSNR(6). PERFORM READHEADER. ENDIF. REPLACE '&' WITH T685T-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT.

WRITE:/001 ITAB-USERNAME. WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. ENDIF. WRITE:/001 ITAB-UDATE. IF WVBELN NE ITAB-VBELN. IF SUDATE = 'X'. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_OLD. WUDATE = ITAB-UDATE. ENDIF. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. IF WFLAG = 'X'.ENDLOOP. IF SUDATE = 'X'. WFLAG = 'X'. WRITE:/001 ITAB-VBELN. CLEAR WFLAG. WRITE:/023 ITAB-USERNAME. 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. WNAME = ITAB-USERNAME. IF WNAME NE ITAB-USERNAME. SKIP. ENDSELECT. . 049 ITAB-POSNR. WVBELN = ITAB-VBELN. SKIP. SORT ITAB BY USERNAME VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. 049 ITAB-POSNR. 023 ITAB-USERNAME. WRITE: /013 ITAB-CHNGIND. ENDIF. WRITE: 013 ITAB-CHNGIND. ENDIF. SORT ITAB BY UDATE VBELN POSNR ETENR. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_NEW. 057 ITAB-ETENR. SKIP. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. ENDIF. ELSE. ENDLOOP. 057 ITAB-ETENR. ELSEIF SOBID NE 'X'. ELSE. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. ENDIF. ELSE. ENDIF. LOOP AT ITAB. SORT ITAB BY VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. WFLAG = 'X'. IF WCHANGENR NE ITAB-CHANGENR. IF WUDATE NE ITAB-UDATE.

WHEN '0000'. CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_HEADERS' EXPORTING DATE_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UDATE OBJECTCLASS = CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS OBJECTID = CDHDR-OBJECTID TIME_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UTIME USERNAME = CDHDR-USERNAME TABLES I_CDHDR = ICDHDR EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDSHW TO ITAB. LEAVE. CLEAR ITAB. LEAVE. CASE SY-SUBRC. CHECK ICDHDR-UDATE IN XUDATE. WHEN OTHERS. ENDFORM. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDHDR TO ITAB. WHEN 'KONVC'. CHECK ICDHDR-USERNAME IN XNAME. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+3(10) TO ITAB-VBELN. WHEN '0002'.FORM READHEADER. MOVE ICDHDR-OBJECTID TO ITAB-VBELN. FORM READPOS. WHEN '0000'. LOOP AT ICDSHW. CHECK ICDSHW-CHNGIND NE 'E'. ENDCASE. CASE ITAB-TABNAME. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+13(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. MESSAGE S311. CASE SY-SUBRC. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. WHEN '0001'. MESSAGE S311. CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_POSITIONS' EXPORTING CHANGENUMBER = ICDHDR-CHANGENR TABLEKEY = CDPOS-TABKEY TABLENAME = CDPOS-TABNAME IMPORTING HEADER = CDHDR TABLES EDITPOS = ICDSHW EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. LOOP AT ICDHDR. .

LEAVE. ENDFORM. ULINE. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. IF SUDATE = 'X'. 065 'Changes'. MOVE '& %' TO ITAB-INDTEXT. WRITE:/ SY-DATUM. 025 'Change Date'. WRITE:/001 'Sale Order'. 049 'Line'. 60 'SALES ORDERS STATISTICS'. SY-PAGNO. WRITE:/001 'User Name'. ELSE. All rights reserved. Every effort is made to ensure the content integrity.com and the content authors. 013 'Time'.End of Program All the site contents are Copyright © www. SKIP. MESSAGE S311. 037 'Sale Order'. 015 'Time'. 041 'Time'. 023 'User Name'.MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+19(4) ENDCASE. The site www.sap-img. 051 'User Name'. ENDCASE. . ULINE. 049 'Line'. Information used on this site is at your own risk. WRITE:/001 'Change Date'. ENDLOOP. 065 'Comment'.sap-img. 057 'Sch No'. ENDIF. 057 'Sch No'.SY-UZEIT. WHEN OTHERS. ENDLOOP. 021 'Sch No'. 50 'SALES ORDER CHANGE HISTORY'. CLEAR ITAB. WRITE: / SY-REPID. 013 'Line'. TOP-OF-PAGE. *--. 037 'Sale Order'. APPEND ITAB. TO ITAB-ETENR. 065 'Changes'. 120 'Page'. 029 'Change Date'. All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.com is in no way affiliated with SAP AG.

The modules must start with "ZZ". You will have User exit for . you make the changes in the program components provided: .Sales Document Processing.MV45AFZZ and MV45EFZ1 For entering installation-specific FORM routines and for using user exits.MV45AIZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing. Involved program components System modifications for sales document processing affect different areas.MV45ATZZ For entering metadata for sales document processing. which may be required and can be used if necessary.com or the content authors. In particular. Depending on the modification. data validation). . . These program components are called up by the modules in MV45AOZZ or MV45AIZZ. the required INCLUDES and user exits are described. These are called up by the screen and run under PAI (Process After Input) after data input (for example. User Exits on Sales and Distribution Where to find the User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality? To see the detail go to SPRO --. .System Modifications --User Exits There you will find all the details by checking IMG Activity Documentation.Sales and Distribution ---. .MV45AOZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing which are called up by the screen and run under PBO (Process Before Output) prior to output of the screen.sap-img. The modules must start with "ZZ". This IMG step describes additional installation-specific processing in sales document processing. User-specific metadata must start with "ZZ".The content on this site may not be reproduced or redistributed without the express written permission of www.

program RV60AFZZ) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMKCV (header fields). Program RV61AFZB) Printing the header line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed. table TVFKD is used to set the billing date (countryspecific requirements in Italy). User exits in program RV60AFZD Short descriptions of the user exits are contained in the program: USEREXIT_RELI_XVBPAK_AVBPAK . program RV60AFZC) This user exit is only called when the billing document is created. USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE is automatically deactivated when this user exit is being applied. these all are trigger during VF02. USEREXIT_PRINT_ITEM (Module pool SAPLV61A. USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE_INV_DATE (Module pool SAPLV60A. It is used to provide the header and the item of the new billing document with deviating or additional data. USEREXIT_FILL_VBRK_VBRP (Module pool SAPLV60A. Customer User Exit For Billing What are the user exit for billing document release to accounting? Please check below exits/customer exits. USEREXIT_PRINT_HEAD (Module pool SAPLV61A. program RV60AFZC) Depending on the number range. USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE (Module pool SAPLV60A. This user exit is only called when the billing documents is created. USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMPCV (Module pool SAPLV60A) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMPCV (item fields). program RV61AFZB) Printing the item line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed. program RV60AFZZ) The internal number range used in the standard system is specified in the billing type table and can be changed in this user exit.You will find all User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality. USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMKCV (Module pool SAPLV60A.

EXIT_SAPLV60B_004: Change a GL account item ACCIT You can add information to a GL account item (such as quantity specifications) with this exit. EXIT_SAPLV60B_006: Change the control line ACCIT You can use exit 006 to add information to the control line. ACCIT and ACCHD After the accounting document is filled in with data. For example. you can use exit 008 to change the document once again.USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAK_AVBPAK USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAP_AVBPAK The following user exits are available in report SAPLV60B for transfer to accounting (function group V60B): EXIT_SAPLV60B_001: Change the header data in the structure acchd You can use this exit to influence the header information of the accounting document. EXIT_SAPLV60B_007: Change the installment plan You can use exit 007 to add information to the installment plan parameters in the GL account item. the name of the person who created it or the transaction with which the document was created. This exit is processed once the ACCIT structure is filled in with data from document header VBRK. EXIT_SAPLV60B_002: Change the customer line ACCIT You can use this exit to change the customer line in the accounting document. EXIT_SAPLV60B_008: Change the transfer structure ACCCR. You can use exit 003 to influence the ACCIT structure. EXIT_SAPLV60B_005: User exit for accruals Once all relevant data for accruals was entered in the GL account item. EXIT_SAPLV60B_010: Item table for customer lines You can use exit 10 to influence the contents of customer lines before they are created. you can add to this data with this exit. you can change the business transaction. "created on" date and time. EXIT_SAPLV60B_003: Change the customer line in costing The customer line is filled in differently for costing. .

.EXIT_SAPLV60B_0011: Change the parameter for cash account determination or reconciliation account determination You can use this exit to change inbound parameters in order to influence account determination. test_pack .Plant is entered manually in handling unit Pack. . matl.Number range interval 'HU_VEKP' IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine material group for packaging material Let's say JGRP IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine allowed packaging materials JGRP . Note: Use enhancement "SDVFX008". create material type=packaging test_pack [SPRO] IMG-Logistics Execution-Shipping-PackingDefine Packaging Material Types Let's say JPAC. The settings that I chose: Plant determ. Basic Process of how Packing Works Let's say you want to pack a material shirt_jai in test_pack. cat. Using MM01. We have done similar development to update SGTXT field in BSEG.blank Number assignment . SDVFX008 will indeed trigger while you create accounting document through VF01 or VF02.JPAC MM02: Check settings for the materials First. Component : "EXIT_SAPLV60B_008". Check whether the function exit is activated. Items .Packaging materials Generate Dlv.

3)In the upper section. It generates a shipping unit/handling unit number. you already created. Or you can do the following steps while you are creating a delivery also. shirt_jai Sales:General/Plant -> Matl. enter the "packing material" (PK-100) 4)In the lower section.hard disks) for a qty . change the "partial quantity" to 40 of material R-1160. Matls: JGRP (Note) Sales:General/Plant -> Packaging Mat.120 pieces.shipping/packing material) and B)these 3 cardboard boxes are put into pallet (PK-095). You need to create a delivery and A)pack 40 pieces each of the material are grouped together into larger cardboard boxes (PK-100 . Matls: JGRP Sales:General/Plant -> Packaging Mat. Grp. Content Author : Jairam Author Website : http://www. Pack. qty" .geocities. Solution: A)Packing 40 pieces each of material (40 x 3 = 120 pieces) 1)Goto [VL02N] to change the delivery. Pack. select both lines of upper & lower section & click the button "per part.Pack) This is how the basic process of packing works.com/jairam143/ The "Packing Process" with an Example Example: You created a order for a material(R-1160 . Type: Basic Data 1 -> Material: JMAT VL01N Outbound Delivery -> Packing Enter the materials at top and at bottom (Select shirt_jai and Edit . 2)Go to "pack" icon. 5)Select both the lines of upper section and lower section and click the green ok. Type: JPAC (Note) Basic Data 1 -> Material: JMAT Then. 6)Now. Grp.Sales:General/Plant -> Matl.

(New HU per part qty of material) Check: click "General Overview" icon to see whether it packed 40 pieces of material in 3 cartons. EK01 : If you use this condition type. click "pack" icon. B)Packing all 3 cartons in one big carton(PK-095) 1) from above screen. The value can be used as a basis for price determination. click "pack HUs" (pack shipping unit) 2)enter the packaging material (PK-095) in the upper section and select this line. Please note the following points : 1) The condition type must have condition category 'Q' (costing). 3)select 3 lines of PK-100 in lower section since you want to pack them in PK-095. Difference between Condition Type Please explain the difference between Ek01 ( Actual Cost) and EK02 Calculated Cost. I have a customer who is being offered two discounts ie k007 and k005. the result of unit costing is simply a statistical value which you can compare with the price. 4)selecting both lines. Then "save" the delivery. These are the condition type that will display the results of the unit costing for certain type of sales document. EK02: If you use this condition type. 5)Now all the 3 cartons(PK-100 with 40 pieces each of material) are packed in one big carton (PK-095). now I want to exclude k007 for the next 2 . 2) The condition type must agree with the condition type defined for unit costing in the pricing procedure. Check: "General overview" icon. the result of unit costing is issued to the first position on the conditions screen for the item.

Hiding Price Condition Types on a Sales Document Up to now you.ZWXX) One way to do it is :Mark the condition types you want to group as statistical and remove the account assignment key. .orders or so? I have set the exclusion indicator for the condition type. you still cannot exclude certain condition types and subtotal lines from being processed or displayed in the condition screen by restricting the authorizations.ZDXX . Am I missing something. how do I do it? I think u need to change the validity of the condition record for the condition type K007 defining it not valid for that particular 2 months. And also the settings of the Requirements as it is correct that it overrules the exclusion. Create a subtotal in your pricing procedure that will add them together and put in the account assignment key for it. Arvind Rana Accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document To accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document without affecting the pricing display in billing document.but still the condition is being accepted when I create a sales order. As an illustration :ZPXX 3500 ZDXX 1000ZWXX 500(all condition types are shown separately in pricing view) Journal: Dr Vendor 2000 Cr Sales 2000 (ZPXX . This way the individual components will still display on your pricing screen but FI will only get one posting.

Pricing procedure assigned to customer (defined in customer master) Hope this helps.You have to implement SAP Note No. The defining parameters for pricing procedure determination are: 1. While specifying requirement. SalesOrg 2. freight etc. discount. Division 4. Distribution Channel 3. (Do assign relevant access sequence) 3. Sabir Reg pricing procedure. Assign this to your relevant sales area+ dpp+cupp. Use transaction code v/06 to define condition type. 105621 . It can be for base price. 2. Use transaction code v/08 to define pricing procedure. Pricing Procedure is determined thru trx OVKK. 4. Use transaction code v/07 to create a access sequence and assign tables based on which you want to carry on pricing as accesses.Authorization check for the condition screen Creating New Pricing Procedure What is the transaction code for creating new pricing procedure and how to attach it to specific plant? You create PP in spro > Sales and Distribution > Basic Functions > Pricing > Pricing Control > Define and Assign Pricing Procedures > Maintain Pricing Procedures You can't attach PP to specific plant.. we can give reqt no.22 which specifies that plant has to be set. Document Procedure (defined in Sales doc\Billing doc maintenance) 5. This is generally done for output taxes since output taxes depend upon the . 1.

" Then. but with a rate of 10%. Here what happens is suppose if you define Your condition type that calculates the base price of a material on Qty based. Now. If the customer orders 10 Nos and you have maintained a unit . the final value would be $100 + (10% of $90) = $109. Instead. Now once again. use an externally calculated 20%. subtraction or multiplication. with a condition record maintained (master data) for $100. Then the calculation will be done based on the quantity of the material. Similarly SAP also has got a default calculation type in the control data of the condition type." Then.use the original price PR00 only. The alternate calculation routine says. This calculation type is either addition. The standard calculation would result in a final value of $110. Fixed Amount Based or Percentage based. The alternate base value could say. Hope this helps. What is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" & "Requirement field" in the Pricing Procedure Can any one explain exactly what is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" and also " Requirement field" in the pricing procedure? The alternate base value is used as the calculation basis only. But directly there is no assignment between plant and pricing procedure. while the alternate calculation is used to modify the final value. Put them both together. imagine you have a condition type ZZ01. you end up with a final value of $100 + (20% of $100) = $120. For example. Alternative Calculation Type: Normally if you want to calculate a value you have to use a calculation type for determinating the value.delivering plant. condition ZZ02 also exists lower in the schema. which was $90. and you could end up with $100 + (20% of $90) = $118. "ignore the 10% altogether. "don't use $100 as the basis -. There you have the options of either Qty based .

The system only accesses a condition table to determine the price if the requirement specified has been met. in those cases.price of 100 Rs for each material then the value determined is 1000 INR. you maintain the calculation type as %.Ajay Kumar Veeranki Re-pricing in a Quotation How can I. For ex if you are calculating the Freight charges for a Material . the weight. Now you don't want to take the base value and take other values as base value which are derived on some formulae. This means if you maintain the value of 10 % in the condition record. you forego the default value and then use the alternative calculation type in calculating the condition value against the particular condition. Alternative Condition Base value : If you have to calculate any value then you have to have a base value for it. Requirement: A factor in the condition technique that restricts access to a condition table. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value. volume and also the minimum amount etc etc. *-. it depends on so many criteria like. One of the accesses in the sequence contains the requirement "in foreign currency." The system only uses the table behind this access if the sales order for which the price must be calculated is in a foreign currency. Example: The system uses an access sequence to determine the price of a material. For ex if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated. or am I able to find anything on a way of RE-Pricing be done in a QUOTATION? . Then this percentage is taken as the calculation type and the condition value is determined. Similarly if the discount condition type . In some cases you have to forego the default calculation types and use the customer specific method for calculating a value. So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type.

this is not only a standard minimum quantity discount. etc. You would vastly prefer to keep one part number that you order from the supplier. 13. You are trying to sell items in specific bulk quantities. The only values for which $50 should apply are 10.multiples of the bulk quantity 10. etc. . consume internally and ship externally. the entire point of using quotations is to firm up details like pricing before creating the sales order. 3. However. if a customer orders 1 piece. You have discussed changing your part number to reflect a bulk qty of 10. If the customer orders 10 pieces of part ABC.You can always 'Update" pricing manually in a quotation the same way you do in a sales order. from a business process perspective it makes absolutely NO sense to reprice a quotation when converting to a sales order. . however you have in house consumption that is allowed to consume only 1 part at a time. Just choose the combination of documents and the respective item category.6c. the price is $50. You are fairly certain there is basic functionality that covers this. it should return $100 again. 30. Quantity Based Discounts in Bulk Quantities Sales You're looking to implement quantity based discounts in 4. and only give the discount for specific quantity intervals. After all. the price is $100. etc. IMG: Sales & Dist --> Sales --> --> Maintain Copy Control for Sales Docs --> Sales Doc to Sales Doc (transaction vtaa). If the customer tries to order 11 pieces. either in create or change modes. 12. The field you need to be concerned with is "Pricing type". However. but you're just not sure where to start. that can be done with the copy controls of the Item Category. 20. If you are asking how to reprice a quotation when it converts into a sales order. For example. of part ABC. Menu path Edit --> New Pricing or press the 'Update pricing' button on the item conditions tab. 2 pieces.

You created a condition table with the above key fields. Determine Sales Price with Shipping Point You are trying to use shipping point as a key field (with sales org. distribution channel and ship-to party together) to determine the sales price. box whatever) 2. Maintain UOM conversion between your base UOM and this new UOM 3. . You can try this :1. it is possible. but shipping point of course is on item level. If it is not then set XKWERT to zero. 4. Create a new condition base value routine via VOFM where you check XKWERT to see if it is a whole number. Maintain bulk price conditon record in the Bulk UOM. Assign this new routine to your bulk price condition in your pricing procedure in ALT condition base value column.e. you found that the shipping point field's document structure is KOMK. There is an error message in the sales order pricing analysis ("access not made" in the shipping point field). 6. That should do it. and maintained the relevant setting (access sequence. Standard SAP scale pricing will not do it in that you only want the reduced price to come into effect when the order quantity is multiple of some bulk factor. Do this by changing through SE11 the table KOMPAZ. Can you put to item level field in the condition table and access sequence? Structure KOMK refers to header of the sales order.Taking your requirements literally. It is agreed with that creating a separate material number is not a good idea. Place this new bulk price behind your normal "PR00" price in the pricing procedure 5. In the access sequence. You'll have to do some settings to reach your goal. Define/Select a UOM for selling in bulk (i. 7. Configure you bulk pricing condition type by usual means (it should be a base price rather than discount). condition type and pricing procedure). Step 1 Append structure KOMP. cas. pallet.

There is a field called proposal for pricing date. Save. Step 4 Finish with the steps you did before. Save. The coding should be like tkomp-zzvstel = vbap-vstel.date (Header) This control is set at the document level as oppose to the condition type level (PR00). Do this under part FORM USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. activate. With the button technical view you can check which one ZZVSTEL or VSTEL. you will see in your sales order that the shipping point is filled with information. Step 3 Make a new table as you did before. Now. but first maintain your new field in Condition: allowed fields. Pricing date based on delivery date Used transaction VOV8. If you want to make more points.Proposed pricing date based on the requested dlv.g. ZZVSTEL with component type VSTEL. A . When you create your new table you will see you have two shipping points. This configuration is by order type. That was ok. . That means your other condition types such as surcharges and discounts are also determined using the requested delivery date. assign search help H_TVST to the component. Say there that field ZVSTEL should be filled with information from your shipping point. Step 2 Change user exit MV45AFZZ. Add a component e. There you can select pricing date as requested delivery date.This is the include for structure KOMP. Ask a programmer if you don't understand this part. generate.

If your requirement is for PR00 to alone to be priced at delivery date then this will not work.

How pricing date is determine in the sales order and billing document? Where is the setting?
The pricing date is proposed based on the setting you make in the Sales document configuration. ( T code : VOV8) You have a field" Prop.f.pricing date " in the Requested delivery date / pricing date / purchase order date segment. Then you can choose the follwoing options: Blank - Indicates the current date as the pricing date A - Indicates the date based on the requested delivery date B - Indicates the date based on the order validity start from date And the pricing in the billing document is copied from thte sales order / Delivery document.. It again depends on the setting u have in the copy control from order - billng or delivery - billing. In the copy control, in the item settings you have two fields relavant for this. One is pricing source and the other is pricing type. The pricing sources are generally the order. But if you want you can change it to other values mentioned in the drop down, but this values have no effect if the pricing type is B. Any other value other than B in the pricing type will take the reference document price mentioned in the pricing source field. but for the pricing type B. The new price is determined in the billing order.

Report to Check the Entered Pricing Condition Price
Which is the best transaction code to check the Pricing condition price entered in "VK11"? Other than "VK13", to display the price, you can use V/LD - Execute Pricing Report to check the prices entered into the Pricing Master.

Normally Pricing Report - "07 Cust.-specific Prices with Scale Display" will do. Other Pricing Reports you can tried are these:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------|LR|Report title | -- -----------------------------------------------------------------------|01|Comparison of Price Lists Without Scale Display | |02|Comparison of Price Groups Without Scale Display | |03|Incoterms with Scale Display | |04|Incoterms Without Scale Display | |05|Price List Types Without Scale Display | |06|Price List Types with Scale Display | |07|Cust.-specific Prices with Scale Display | |08|Cust.-specific Prices W/out Scale Display | |09|Material List/Material Pricing Group with Scale Display | |10|List Mat./Mat.Pricing Groups Without Scale Display | |11|Price Groups With Scale Display | |14|Taxes | |15|Material Price | |16|Individual Prices | |17|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer | |18|Discounts and Surcharges by Material | |19|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group | |20|Discounts and Surcharges by Material Group | |21|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material | |22|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material Group | |23|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material | |24|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material Group | |25|VAT/ATX1 | |26|Canada/USA | |27|I.E.P.S Mexico | |28|Conditions by Customer | |30|Conditions by Customer Hierarchy | |31|Price List with Release Status | |AC| | |AD| | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Mass Update of condition pricing
You can update the condition pricing for a range of sales order. For e.g. if you create sales order for 15 months or so, and at the beginning of each year, you have to update the prices for lots of sales orders. Other than using VA02 and make an Update of the conditions at item level which is a big work because you will have lots of open sales order after so many months. Use VA05, select your Orders and on the result screen :click Edit- > Mass Change -> New Pricing (menu).

or if you don't want to do that Online, write your own abap report and use Function SD_BULK_CHANGE (check where-Used at SE37, Trace VA05 on how to fill the parameters, Function MPRF => New Pricing)

Make Material Master Price of a material as sales price automatically
The first method is not to set the pricing condition VPRS as statistical. Simply remove PR00 and it will work fine if you always use VPRS as your pricing base inside the pricing procedure. VPRS will reads both prices based on the price control in the material master. Price control S for standard price. Price control V for moving average price. It is this simple if you do not have any other "Prices" in the price procedure. However, if you are using one pricing procedure where for some items you price using VPRS and some others using PR00, then you should use requirement routines to enable the correct price condition type at the right time. The second method involves more work as you need to write a formula (VOFM) to get that information. This is how it goes :1. Set VPRS to be the first step in the pricing procedure and to be subtotal B (as standard). 2. Set PR00 with alt. calc. type formula, which sets the value of PR00 to be equal to the subtotal B. The routine (created with transaction VOFM) is: RV64A901 FORM FRM_KONDI_WERT_600. XKWERT = KOMP-WAVWR. ENDFORM.

The pricing procedure than looks like that: Step 1 VPRS statistical, subtotal B, reqt 4 Step 2 PR00 Altcty 600

Customer discounts on effort only
-----Original Message----Subject: Customer discounts on effort only Hi All, We have a requirement of giving a discount to customer based on the total amount invoiced so far (across financial years). Where do we set this up? We have seen so far the discounts are calculated based on the value of the current invoice. The discount should be on a graduated scale basis for example 0 - 100000 No discount 100000 - 200000 5% 200000 - and above 10% This means that discount would only start after the customer's net sale value crosses 100000. For example, if the customer has been billed for 99000 and the current invoice is for 3000, a discount of 5% should be given on 2000 i.e. 100. Another complication is that, the discount is not based on the total amount billed so far, but only on the effort billed and not on reimbursements (like airfares, living expenses, visa charges, beeper charges etc). The discount applies only to the effort and not to the reimbursements. In the above example (invoice of 3000) say the effort billed is only 1500, the rest being reimbursements. The discount is only on the 500. (the rest being taken up by the lower limit for eligibility of 100000) For example the customer might have been billed say 150000 so far but actual effort billed might be only 90000, the rest being reimbursements of actual costs and hence the customer is not eligible for the discount. Kindly help, -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only

Hi, The solution for this is Using rebate condition types and suitable condition records. Of this to handle your first problem that is the rebate has to be applied only on the "effort" you have to set up a line in the pricing procedure which gives the rebate basis i.e the value to be used for rebate cond types. This I believe solves your problem of rebate only on effort. Your second problem i.e the discount should start getting applied automatically when it reaches the first scale for which the values span few financial years. This I am not really sure whether it can be made possible in the invoice itself. But a work around is not giving the discount directly in the invoice but settling it against the rebate agreements by Credit notes periodically. Hope it helps. Thanks -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only Hi Arent we looking at rebate agreeement. That appears to be a straightaway solution to your problem. You activate the sales organization and the payer for that Regards -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only I am in SAP R/3 rel.30F. We have 2 options to meet your requirement. 1. Using scale in condition type ( tcode V/06 ), choose scale basis G.Scale based on a formula ( be: your based amount is invoice ). Define scale formula. You need ABAPER to define it. 2. Using routine in Alt.calc.type ( tcode V/08 , Maintain Pricing Procedure ). Here, you also need ABAPER to create routine.

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS ->. ACCOUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT Transaction Code: VOPA 6) Assign the Partner Functions to the Partner Procedure for the Sales Document Header . CUSTOMIZING ->.hope this help -----End of Message----- Steps to Create Commission for Agent For creating commission agent. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 3) Create a Partner Procedure for the Commissionees Menu Path: TOOLS ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 2) Assign the Partner Functions to Partner Procedures Menu Path: TOOLS ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. PARTNER FUNCTIONS ->. LOGISTICS BASIC DATA: BUSINESS PARTNERS >. CONTROL ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. 1) Establish Partner Functions for the Commissionee(s) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. ENVIRONMENT ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. DEFINE ACCOUNT GROUPS AND FIELD SELECTION FOR CUSTOMER Transaction Code: OVT0 5) Assign the Partner Functions to the Customer Account Group(s) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. you have to follow below steps. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 4) Create New Customer Account Group(s) for Commission Agents Menu Path: TOOLS ->. CUSTOMERS ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. GOTO ->. LOGISTICS GENERAL ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->.

DEVELOPMENT ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->.userexit_pricing_prepare_tkomk (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. deletion). DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. MAINTAIN ACCESS . Define Partner Functions Transaction Code: VOPA 7) Assign the Partner Functions to the Partner Procedure for the Sales Document Item (OPTIONAL) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. Basic Functions ->. DICTIONARY Transaction Code: SE11 9) Edit MV45AFZZ ± userexit_pricing_prepare_tkomk (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. DEFINE PARTNER FUNCTIONS Transaction Code: VOPA 8) Edit the Pricing Communication Structure (KOMKAZ) to Hold the New Functions (Client Independent) Menu Path: Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. Business Engineer ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. Partner Determination ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->.userexit_new_pricing_vbkd changing new_pricing (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. addition. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. PRICING ->. PARTNER DETERMINATION ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 11) Edit MV45AFZB . BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. ABAP WORKBENCH ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. Sales and Distribution >. 13) Add the KOMKAZ Fields to the Pricing Field Catalog (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. Customizing ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 The following code should be inserted into program MV45AFZZ to allow the system to re-execute pricing if the user makes a change to the relevant partner function (alteration. PRICING CONTROL ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.Menu Path: Tools ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 10) Edit RV60AFZZ .

BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. PRICING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. Whenever we define our pricing procedures. MAINTAIN ACCESS SEQUENCES Transaction Code: V/03 15) Create an access sequence containing the new tables (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. ABAP EDITOR Transaction Code: SE38 SD Questions About Pricing Condition The Most Important Tips in Pricing For SAP SD Module to crack interviews. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->. DEFINE CONDITION TYPES ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. PRICING ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. CUSTOMIZING ->. DEFINE AND ASSIGN PRICING PROCEDURES ->. PRICING ->. we remain least interested in creating our own Condition Types. MAINTAIN PRICING PROCEDURES Transaction Code: V/08 11) Create Commsission Report ZZCOMMISSION (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->.Condition . CUSTOMIZING ->.SEQUENCES Transaction Code: OV24 14) Create Condition Tables (Client Independent) Menu Path: TOOLS ->. DEFINE ACCESS SEQUENCES ->. MAINTAIN ACCESS SEQUENCES Transaction Code: V/07 16) Create a new condition type Menu Path: TOOLS ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->. BASIC FUNCTIONS ->.. ABAP WORKBENCH ->.. MAINTAIN CONDITION TYPES Transaction Code: V/06 17) Add the Condition Type to the Pricing Procedure Menu Path: TOOLS ->. PRICING ->. DEVELOPMENT ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. PRICING CONTROL ->. SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ->. BUSINESS ENGINEER ->.

using T-Codes is more smarter than following paths through IMG screen. In VK11 you can store condition record for more than one condition type. K007. Document Pricing Procedure & Customer Pricing Procedure " . What is the difference of VK11 and VK31 (condition records)? My condition type is PR00 and Access sequence is PR02. Also to inform that.if you go through the menu path you will get the vk 31 as condition record from the tamplets whereas vk11 as simple condition record. What is the difference between Header condition and Item condition? I know item condition applies to each item in a sales document. KA02. K004.Tables & Access Sequences. "V/06" & "V/07". After that we put the values against each Condition Types.This feature is given to enhance the system's performane and not to create the duplcation of the work for each condition type. And in this access sequence table 304 is available.) & then assign that Pricing Procedure with " Sales Area. Difference between header and item condition . Difference between VK11 and VK31 . Condition Types & Access Sequence Creation. Header condition can only be applied to an entire document. But when I was entering the PR00 at VK11 it is accepting it. KF00 etc. Now it will become easy to create the same. What we do is.as YOU CORRECTLY SAID HEADER CONDITION IS APPLICABLE FOR THE WHOLE DOCUMENT where . Again system is not allowing to store the record in the vk31 for the condition type pr00 and access sequence pr02. So for that purpose we have to use the following T-Codes respectively : "V/05". Utsav Mukherjee . mentioned in our Pricing Procedure by using the T-Code "VK11". we just define our own pricing procedures by using the existing condition types (i. Now when I was entering the PR00 in VK31 it shows error Table 304 is not defining for the condition type PR02. This means you can have same condition record for different condition types.utsavmukherjee143@hotmail.But you see there is the difference between the technical view of it for transfering the data from document field and condition field.This is because if you see this ac seq cointains two accessses 20 and 30 having the same table no. But we also need to know about the Condition Tables.so you can not maintain the data at VK31.e: PR00.

. this is a condition required for a particular condition type to be executed. Eg.How I can accomplish the following: Be able to DISALLOW Z0BP Condition type to be negative ( Invoice Block) You can modify condition type from customising. These differenes are controlled through the indicator of group condition in the cond. which can be processed for further calculation. You have two different types of the header conditions. And so obviously header condition can not have the condition record and hence access sequence. sub total altclty.Ex-Say fright is dependent on the total weight of all the items in the documents then header condition adds on weights of all items and calculates the record accordingly. Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Define Condition Types->Maintain Condition Types Change condition type ZOBP's plus/minus indicator to "A" which means only positive is allowed. Requirement: Denoted by nos and maintained in VOFM.type configuration. What are these and where we calculate all these values which we put. accurals. altbv. Subtotal: this represents where a which table a value is stored. SAP SD Tips by : Vishwajit Disallowing Condition Types .as item is for item.Say discount 2% at header level which is also applicable to all the items b)Second is the accumulation of the values of all the item at the header level.Arvind Rana In pricing procedure there are column such as requirement. 1. *-.as earlier explained for the weight/fright. PR00: req 2 ie item relevant for pricing VPRS/EKO1: req 4 ie cost Rebate BAO1 Req 24/Req 25 etc 2. a) In one you can duplicate the same value throughout the document for each item.

the order value comes out to be $4500. that is calculation is done as per unit price. Here I'm giving a simple guide to add fields to the Pricing Field Catalogues: For example you want to use field PSTYV ('Sales document item category') that is included in structure KOMP ('Pricing Communication Item') as a key for a condition table. for PR00. one the rebate for certain amount is settled the amount from the accruals get deducted. Eg.. if this value is to be used for credt check of a customer. if the pricing scale is maintained and pricing for 45 units comes under the scale of $100 per unit. that is the base value based on which the order value is to be calculated changes.. and maintained in VOFM.Eg. 4.Please follow steps in below sequenceTry to add the filed from the field catalog. 3 Alternate Calculation type: this is also denoted by numbers and maintained in VOFM. It is most common that one or other time we need to use this function while configuring multi tasking & complex Pricing Architecture. each unit is charged $100 per unit. Accruals: Accruals are maintained for rebate agreements. alternate calculation type can be configured. *-.. 5. Alternate base value: Denoted by no. it constitutes the total accumulated value which customer has earned through rebate. we mark the subtotal as A.Nitin Add a Field To New Condition Table in Pricing Add a field to a new condition table in Pricing (Condition Technique):I will explain you the process with below example. . Suppose for 45 units . an alternate base value is confihured. you can add the field through the following process to filed catalog and create the condition table. but if the client wants a standard base value in some casesto be assumed inspite of maintaining the scale. Eg. if the client wants calculation type to be based on volume or wieght. the base value is 45 units. In case the required combination field is not there.

you can use. PSTYV are the other terms which we need to know about. In order processing you find the user exit in Include MV45AFZZ. and in billing document processing you find it in Include RV60AFZZ. 6. however.When you create a condition table (Transaction V/03). check and activate your entries. 4. field catalog. 5.sales document item category' and as a field label. KOMKAZ. allowed fields. Proceed as follows: 1. field ZZPSTYV is now known in structures KOMG and KOMP because structure KOMPAZ is included in both structures. for example. field PSTYV was included in structure KOMP. Reason and Prerequisites: For technical reasons.As a short text. 3. KOMP. 'ZZ . Navigate to 'Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions > Pricing -> Pricing Control' and execute 'Define Condition Tables'. the system does not propose the field in the field catalog. KOMK. Condition access. . 2. to add Fields. KOMG. you can use the field labels of PSTYV.Save. Note:Because of the change in structure KOMPAZ. Choose PSTYV as a domain. Consider that you can also use this note as a help if you want to use other customerspecific fields as key fields in a condition table. Note:Now you can use field ZZPSTYV as a key field when you create a condition table Axxx. Call up the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) and create data type ZZPSTYV. Supply the new field you defined by including the following source code line in USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP: MOVE xxxx-PSTYV TO TKOMP-ZZPSTYV. Call up structure KOMPAZ in the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) in the change mode and make the following entry: Component Component type: ZZPSTYV ZZPSTYV Save. Call up Transaction SPRO. however. check and activate the change you made. KOMPAZ. not in structure KOMG ('Allowed Fields for Condition Structures'). Choose 'Conditions: Allowed fields' and include ZZPSTYV as a new entry.

When we go to the conditions section in a sales order.HB00 . where the details of pricing is mentioned. This amount is applicable to all items. see Transaction SPRO via the path 'Sales and Distribution -> System Modifications -> Create New Fields (Using Condition Technique) -> New Fields for Pricing' and OSS Note 21040. Usage of this feature is to apply price / discount for a specific group of materials.Numeric value or Absolute value. You maintained a discount based condition record fbased on material group ( = 01 for example). .% Based Header Condition.HA00 . *-. . 1. Whenever any Header Condition is used. these conditions are to be entered manually and get distributed automatically and the basis for distribution are taken from the NET VALUE of items mentioned at item level. For more information.RB00 . Examples of header condition. . .Absolute or numeric value which applies to all items. it overrides the PR00 condition type.Vivek Chokshi What is the difference between group condition and header condition? Group Condition: You can use this is feature of a condition type to apply price or discount for a material based on common property.Manoj Mahajan Header Condition and Group Condition What are header conditions? Header conditions are those which appear in the header level of any sales order. Header Condition: This is a manual condition which you apply to header (Condition screen) of a sales document.For header fields. *-. use structure KOMKAZ instead of structure KOMPAZ and USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMK instead of USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. You maintained scales also. here we add these conditions.

3.12 No's Rs. Just try a sales order and see the out come Procedure to Test: 1. While calculating the discount.Qty 1 .10 11 .25 No's ITEM 2 .Tsr 5. Steps Involved In Condition Technique . Is it clear now. *-. Activate the condition type as a group condition. In the above example total quantity is = 109.00 Rs. 4. Maintain Material Group of each item is same. 105.3 No's ITEM 3 .27 No's Rs. If you have not activated the group condition feature.50 51 .25 No's Rs.27 No's ITEM 5 . System apply a discount of Rs.62 No's Rs.00 ITEM 5 .00 to each item irrespective of the individual quantities.00 ITEM 3 . Create 3 materials.00 5.12 No's ITEM 4 . 110. Discount ITEM 1 . 115. 105. because of this group condition. 100. 110. Check the outcome. system add the quantities of items which have material group = 01.00 ITEM 4 .00 Rs. 3. You are creating a sales order for a customer with five different items with different quantities as below ITEM 1 .00 etc. 2. 4. 105.3 No's Rs.62 No's All the material is having the material group = 01. 105. Process a sales order for a customer with these three material with different quantities. 2. Create a condition record for this condition type with scales.00 ITEM 2 . system determines the discount value based on individual item quantity which is as below.150 Discount Rs. 100.

Define your Access Sequence and include the above Table in your Access Sequence Step 3. Few important things to note is following. .Sales Order . Do not forget to mention your Access Sequence while defining your Condition Type 5. Do not forget to mention the Range (From To) while creating your Pricing Procedure. T Code VOK0 Step 1. Lets say it depends on Customer and Material. XD01 . Define/Choose your Table (with the requirement parameters that influence the price) Step 2. Freight and Tax) and include your Access Seq. Define your Condition Type (There are four Price Types Basic Price. 2. Its always better to copy the Price Types provided by SAP. Now comes Procedure Determination where you specify the Document Pricing Procedure and Customer Pricing Procedure along with Sales Organisation. VA01 . Step 6. Discount. There is a table 5 which already has Customer and Material so we can now copy and rename it or use the same table in our Pricing Procedure.What are the 8 steps involved in condition technique? By: Rohit Joshi It starts with an understanding of the factors that influences the Price. With this understanding now we will start with the Table where we will pass the above parameters.Always ensure that you pick the right Customer Pricing Procedure from here. Step 4. check your Fields and ensure that they appear with any warning (Highlighted in Red) 4. Always remember that your Procedure Determination has only Basic Price as Condition Type 6. Now comes your Pricing Procedure where you include include Condition Types and format. Distribution Channel.Create Customer . 1. Maintain Condition Records for your Condition Types I guess you can make it 8 Steps by dividing some of the main steps.Ensure that you have the right Document Pricing Procedure from here 3. While Creating Access Sequence. Step 5..

you can not create condition records for them in the standard system. So the Header freight is splitting irregularly for two line items (in item conditions) . R/3 includes the following header conditions: .Absolute discount (HB00) .Freight (HD00) .Order value (HM00) Header Condition: If this condition is marked as a header condition. How it is happening? Any formula is there? Header Conditions . I maintained two line items in the Sales Order. it is possible to enter the condition type in the header condition screen. Sales Order Freight Condition In Header Condition ERP SAP ==> SD SAP Common questions: We are using the Freight in Header Condition. The nature of header condition is that whatever value you are giving in sale order / billing.Percent discount (HA00) .Automatic pricing does not take header conditions into account. line item wise. Group Condition: Group conditions are helpfull incase of discounts.I made most of the mistakes that appear above. Further Group condition: Indicates whether the system calculates the basis for the scale value from more than one item in the document. Header conditions are entered manually in order processing. Checks for changing the condition manually are unaffected by this. . If group condition is selected then the discount percentage or quantity is applicable for the total sum of the quantity in the PO for those materials belonging to the same material group. Suppose if two materials of same matl grp have discounts for 100 qty and above but in PO if the two matls are bieng procured for 50 qty then they cant avail discounts but if group condition is selected then the sum of the quantity of both matl of same matl group is considered (50 + 50) and discount can be availed for 100 qty. it will be distributed proportionately. Hope it helps.

does not have any access sequence .25144 Freight conditions during milestone billing What is meant by condition exclusion for Condition types and records? Condition Exclusion The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents.84605 Transfer absolute amount condition to billing doc.field Group condition is selected Normally Freight Header condition like condition type "HD00" is calculated on the basis of weight. Based on whether the group condition field is ticked on or off.876617 FAQ: Header conditions / Header condition screen .485740 Conditions with fixed amount in copy activities To achieve what you wish (absolute amount). possibly irrespective of different weight which may not be logical. a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD.If you access V/06 and the header condition type. That is the standard behaviour of the header condition type. If you will uncheck the group condition field. the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces.25020 Value changes during over/underdelivery . . Therefore. you must follow two steps: . Since this is a particularly good price. it will either split the header condition value to the items on pro-rata basis or it will just duplicate the header value to all the items. However. you can see that the condition type . the same freight amount will be copied to each item.317112 Behavior of conditions w/ calculation rule B changed . To do this. this discount is to be excluded from pricing. solution is in the below Notes: . What you are experiencing with Fixed Amount Header conditions is standard behaviour. This is a Manual condition and you have to enter it in the header screen. It will be proportionately distributed on each item on the basis of weight. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. Please see below Notes: . Material 4711 costs 150 USD.

. This means that if a condition record contains condition supplements they will be taken into account during pricing. Condition Exclusion Group ± In any normal situation there could be more than one condition type in a pricing procedure offering a discount to a customer.Basic functions ± pricing ± condition exclusion ± condition exclusion for groups of conditions (OV31).You must set a condition exclusion indicator for the price. A condition exclusion group is merely a grouping of condition types that are compared to each other during pricing and result in the exclusion of particular condition types within a group or entire groups. It is important to note that the condition types you want the system to compare must exist in the pricing procedure and must have valid condition records created for them.Sales & Distribution . you can see that the condition offering the most favorable discount to the customer is represented in the pricing procedure. with condition type PR00) when defining a condition type in SD Customizing . the discount is not valid if the condition exclusion indicator is set. there is the risk that the customer will receive all the relevant discounts and thus purchase the product for a lower price than he should. If this condition is set. only for material 4711) in the detail screen of a condition record (in the Condition exclusion field) You must set a condition for the discount in the pricing procedure in Customizing for sales. Condition 2 is available in the standard R/3 System.for all condition records of a condition type (e. By using µcondition exclusion groups¶ you can ensure that the customer does not receive all the discounts. You can do this in two ways: If you want to set the condition exclusion indicator a follows then you specify it: . The condition exclusion indicator is not valid for condition supplements. a sales order is created using the pricing procedure that the exclusion group is assigned to.g.g. Menu path ± IMG . If for example. Should the discounts be automatically determined.for an individual condition record (e. but instead only receives the best of the available discount condition types.

. while another condition type K005 has offered a real value discount of $10. where you can find a entry saying µInactive A condition exclusion item¶. After completing the assignment of the condition types to the exclusion group. the system will merely find the first condition record and stop searching for other records. select the folder µExclusion¶ where you can assign the relevant condition exclusion procedure to the relevant condition exclusion group. There are four possible methods of using condition exclusion groups ± A ± best condition between the condition types B ± best condition within the condition types C ± best condition between the two exclusion groups D ± exclusive E ± least favorable within the condition type F ± least favorable within the two exclusion groups Configuring µCondition Exclusion Groups¶ First step is to define a µcondition exclusion group¶ by using a four character alpha numeric key. The system then takes the best discount for the customer between the two. After selecting the pricing procedure for which you want the condition exclusion to be active. Otherwise. Next step is to assign the relevant condition types to the exclusion groups such as discount condition types. condition type K007 has offered a discount of 10% off the sale price or a real value of $30.For instance. This can be seen by double clicking on the condition type K005. The most important thing to remember here is to ³deactivate´ the Exclusive Indicator on the access sequence assigned to that condition type. When using the condition exclusion group to find the best condition record in a condition type ± only use one condition type per exclusion group. proceed with assigning the condition exclusion group to the relevant pricing procedure. freight condition types. which is K007 and makes the other discount K005 inactive.

all Z programs and Transactions. for every SOX audit done in the company.. get information for price (discounts) that existed at previous period (Say June 200X) 2. Also V/LD is very useful. Clients prefer customized reports when it comes to pricing reports . Sales org/Dc/Division/Plant /material etc wise.What is difference between pricing report & condition index? Pricing Report: A Pricing report basically helps to get the list of all the pricing details which we have maintained in the system. We can get details of all the condition types including the scales. Inform potential buyer about the current price (and discounts) 3. It informs you about the customer specific price agreements that were made within a certain period 2. We can get the details as per our requirement i. Review price and discounts. Which condition records exist for customers in a particular region or country You can create your own pricing reports with V/LA.. it is not widely used. From pricing report you can know which condition records exist for freight charges 3.. The selection criteria would be as per the Key combination which you select in the IMG screen You get following information from pricing report. The sales personnel use it to 1.especially the change records for prices. This can be customized. Condition Index . Though all the above T Codes and there are many More standard SAP Reports have very high utility. These kind of reports are generally required by the Top Management for periodical review // Finance team for price control // Master data team for record purposes // Process audits by Internal/external agency // Of late.e. 1.

Condition base value is a concept used in pricing procedure and actual term used is alternate condition base value. So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type. . It becomes easier and faster to search for condition records for a customer or material just like it become easier to search a topics in the book with help of index. in additional data put "maximum number of orders" as 10. Now go to change(VK32). You can set the discount for fast ten orders through "condition update".Condition index is very useful for searching the condition record for a customer.Units of Measure. you will find a column "N". You have to mark the "condition index" check box in the condition type and you have to activate the index in customization. You may also create the condition record for discount through VK31. you don't want to take the base value and take other value as base value which are derived on some formula. Now. Second. If you have to calculate price of a material then you have to have a base value for it. For e. First. scroll to the right. Here you can put value 10 and save it. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value.Additional Data . system will give the discount to the first 10 orders. Now. This is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternate base value for the calculation of the value. This is maximum number of order field. in your discount condition type(V/06) activate the "condition update" check box.g. if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated. Where does the standard condition base value (Default one) is determined for a Condition type? First check the Material Master UOM Conversion . in the condition record.

requirement in pricing procedure? 2) Where do we define value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type so that system picks up different value. What is the difference between: 1. instead of standard condition technique. 1) What is the role of alternative calculation type. Conditional amount 1. Go to transaction V/08 here you select pricing procedure then go in to the control data of the pricing procedure here you can find Alter native Condition Base Value in the 14th column of the pricing procedure control data. based on certain calculation this value is taken as base. Conditional base value 2. It is a routine which is assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure. Conditional base value When a value is derived for a condition type. condition base value. Conditional value. when the value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type is mention in pricing procedure? **Alternative Calculation Type:** This function allows you use a formula as an alternative in finding the value of the condition type. this can be used to calculate complex tax structures. Conditional amount This is nothing but the unit list price what you are mentioning for the line item. 3. 3. . For the number of units ordered depending on the condition amount mentioned this value is derived. 2.As per my understanding there is Alternative Condition Base Value. Conditional value.

Requirement This function is used to assign a requirement to the condition type. distributed in the standard system according to the cumulative value of the items. .cal type-16.Alternative condition base value The alternative condition base value is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternative base value for the calculation of a value.(With Formula) $20 $10 $10 $20 Condition formula for alternative calculation type Alternative formula to the formula in the standard system that determines a condition. Example An absolute header discount is. 1 $1000 2 cbm 2 $500 4 cbm Stand. when checked in analysis it says requirement 013 is not fulfilled. for example. If the system distributes the absolute header discount according to volume based on the Alternative formula for condition base value . This requirement can be used to exclude the system from accessing the condition type and trying to determine the value. alt. This can be used to specify that the condition type should only be accessed if the customer has a low risk credit. but in pricing procedure I've assigned the requirement as 013. a header discount of $30 results in the following discounts: Item Value Volume . Volume disc. alt CBV-4. Rounding Off Condition Not Appearing In Sales Order In sales order Diff condition type is not coming. disc.

In the document pricing procedure. the user has configured the SAP delivered condition type DIFF to calculate the difference when rounding occurs. or try this go to IMG path --> SAP Netweaver --> General Settings --> Currencies --> Define rounding rules for currencies.Please refer to the following documentation for requirement 013: RE LV61A013 Title Rounding as per Table T001R Purpose This is an example of a pricing requirement. This information is stored in Table T001R. This requirement is met if an entry has been made in the 'Unit to be rounded up to' field in Table T001R. Using this requirement. Go to v/08 maintain in condition base value 16 routine. . Here maintain the rounding unit which will be stored in Table T001R. This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. Please check the customizing table T001R. Example A company has the requirement to carry out rounding for certain company code and currency combinations. the difference is only calculated when necessary. This requirement can be assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure that is used to calculate the difference when rounding. Table T001R stores the rounding rules for company code and currency combinations. The user also assigns pricing requirement '13' to the condition type DIFF in the pricing procedure so that the condition is only calculated when a corresponding entry has been maintained in the table T001R. Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. then in the t-code ob90 you can maintain that. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure.

base value Round according to T001R Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. When formula '17' is assigned to a condition type. This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. Condition type DIFF was delivered to perform the rounding at the end of the pricing procedure with the total value. the condition value will always be rounded using T001R.Formula '16' was delivered along with condition type DIFF to support the rounding unit rules that can be defined in T001R for company code / currency combinations.g. Where I can do setting of rounding profile for a new created condition type? 1) Create Rounding rule ( Unit of measure rounding rules ) Path : Materials --> SPRO Quantity Optimizing and Allowed --> Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Management Unit of Measure Rounding Rules --> Logistics Units of Measure Here give new rounding rule and % rounding up and down values 2) Create Unit of measure groups Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Unit of Measure --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Groups Create new group for YD and ROL 3) Dynamic rounding profile . plus 5 or 10 or 100 units) that can be defined in T001R for company code / currency combinations. Using formula '16'. Formula '17' was delivered so that a condition value could be rounded off according to the rounding unit rules (e. the system computes the rounded value and assigns the difference to the condition type DIFF. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure. In-17 c.

rounding off method as 2. and then write the ABAP code to transfer the data in the field from the transaction tables to the communication structure. Assign created Rounding profile in info record also UOM group Maintain minimum order qty as 1 Rol and Order unit as ROL in Info record In material master maintain conversion as 1 Rol = 3500 yards How To Create Field in KOMP. They are called KOM ³x´ because they are communications structures used to communicate the transaction data with the pricing procedure. one must create new fields for pricing. such as VBAK and VBAP (for the order transaction). one can add the fields from the list of available fields. For rounding profile. These tables contain the header and item data for pricing respectively. For this reason. it means that it is not in KOMK or KOMP. KOMG New Fields in Pricing To use a field in pricing. Table KOMG contains the fields of tables KOMK and KOMP. you need to add this field to the KOMK or KOMP structures. However. If you require a field that is not in KOMG. and rounding rule which you have created. This means that the field you require cannot be used in pricing because there is no communication of this field from the transaction to the pricing procedure via the communication structures. This condition table is created using the allowed fields from the field catalog. one creates a condition table.Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Maintain Rounding --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Profile Here give Rounding profile name and plant and click on Dynamic to create new profile In next screen give desc. one may find that a new field may not be in the list of available fields. To use a field not defined in the field catalog. The field catalog is a structure (KOMG) that consists of two tables (KOMK and KOMP). Should the fields one requires not be included in the list of allowed fields. Follow these steps: . The document and item data in SD is stored in data tables. Many of the fields from these tables are available in the field catalog.

In ABAP. the order table VBAK). generate the structure KOMP. Let¶s say you need to use the ³base material´ to define a price and the base material is not in the pricing field catalog. . The base material is a field on the material master basic data screen and is defined as MARA-WRKST. you¶ll need to add it to the include table KOMPAZ in table KOMP. Adding the Field to KOMK and KOMP This process requires some knowledge of the ABAP dictionary and how to use the ABAP dictionary to create and change fields and tables.´ Therefore. write the ABAP code in user exit USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in RV60AFZZ. Since this relates to the material. This field is not available in the field catalog and can be used in condition tables. write the ABAP code in user exit USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in include program MV45AFZZ. Writing the ABAP Code The field in the communications structure will be blank unless the ABAP code transfers the data from the material master to the field KOMPZZWRKST. If the field is from the item table (for example.1. when you add the field. You may have to use an ABAP skill to assist you. it is at the item level. 2. For the billing transaction. the order item table VBAP). Create the field in the KOMK (header data) and KOMP (item data) tables using the standard includes provided for this requirement. After adding the field. Note When you add a field to these tables. If the field is from the header table (for example. For the order transaction. Pricing occurs in the order and in the invoice. System modification. Create new fields (using the condition technique). Sales and distribution. so you would add the field to the KOMPAZ include table. Menu Path The menu path here is IMG. so you need to put this code in both places. New fields for pricing. you¶ll need to add it to the include table KOMKAZ in table KOMK. it must start with ³ZZ. the field you add would be ZZWRKST. use the same domain as in the field in the original table MARAWRKST. Write the code in the user exit to read the transaction data and transfer it to the KOM ³x´ structures.

It would then transfer this field to the structure TKOMP from MOVE MARAWRKST to TKOMP-ZZWRKST.Accounting sections . F5 670 Diagnosis No account was specified for account type "S" in item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document.Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically.Note : The TKOMP is for the item level. If you are writing the code for a field at the header level.Header . Check the data transferred to item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document. .Goto .Field name: Acct assgmt group). The ABAP code would select the Base material field from the material master table using the material from table VBAP/VBRP. The Account Assignment Group will be copied automatically into the sales order.Financial Accounting . you would use the user exits that end with TKOMK.Header . you will have to check whether have the Account Assignment Group been input in the Customer Master (Billing tabstrips .Goto . Check whether the sales order (VA03 . Check whether the billing document (VF03 . Assuming that one of the key combination is Account Assignment Group. Check whether the configuration in transaction VKOA have been done correctly. Billing cannot be Release to Accounting This SAP message will appear if the system is unable to find the G/L codes match from the configuration in transaction VKOA No account is specified in item 0000001001 Message no.Header . Procedure A system error has probably occurred in the application you called up.Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically. System Response The Financial Accounting program cannot process the document.

therefore. then the user will have to maintained the Account Assignment Group manually either in the sales order or the billing documents. This is after clicking the Display Billing List Button. Default Start Variant for VF04 There are two types of variant in VF04. Take note for One Time Customer. One is the selection variant before clicking the Display Billing List Button. One Time Customer can be used by many customer.If the customer master have not been maintained and the user have already input the sales order. . you can set it by clicking :Settings -> Display Variant -> Administration Select the layout display variant you want and click :Edit -> Define default settings Condition Exclusion which will be determined in the billing document The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing. the system will not be able to determine the Account Assignment Group manually. The second variant is the Billing Layout display variant. You can set the start variant via SE93 using the Change mode. After creating your layout display variant. the user have to input the Account Assignment Group manually into the sales order.

To achieve this. Related Topics: Create/Modify Billing Document Type Steps for creating new or changing existing Billing Doc Type Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution. Assign the procedure to the pricing schema. Since this is a particularly good price. Define new document pricing procedure in SM30 . To create a condition exclusion procedure which will be determined in the billing document. Assign the Billing Pricing Procedure in VOK8 for the Condition Exclusion Groups. this discount is to be excluded from pricing. the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. However. Assign the Condition type for the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV32.V_TVKV for billing. and maintain copy control so that pricing is not copied from Sales Order. When billing document is being created just enter manually your new price and the pricing program logic will include only the higher price one. Certification.V_TVFK_PR Define the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV31.For example: Material 4711 costs 150 USD. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. Assign new document pricing procedures to billing types in SM30 . excluding the rest that are lower price. copy the standard pricing to a ZXXXX Pricing. Interview Questions Reference Books . a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD. Therefore.

you can manually transfer blocked billing documents to accounting by selecting: Billing -> Change -> Release accounting 2) Account determination procedure 3) Output determination procedure etc. for example. Next. A billing type with VBTYP '5' can only be canceled with the VBTYP '6' and vice versa. (VBTYP 'M') can only be canceled with billing type S1 with VBTYP 'N' . the field must be blank and the account determination procedure must be empty. 3) Cancellation billing document type partner functions A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type partner functions are empty or if those that correspond to the billing type used are empty. An F2 invoice.. (VBTYP = U).. Indicates whether the system blocks automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting. use transaction VCHECKVOFA to check your configuration :1) Proforma billing types: If it is a proforma billing type. After customizing. During document processing. make sure that you maintain the copy control for the Billing Types: . mark the field.SAP Sales and Distribution Tips SAP SD Discussion Forum and Sales/Distribution Tips Steps for creating a new or changing an existing Billing Document Types Create/Change your Billing types configuration in VOFA. . Some of the IMG stuff are :1) To block automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting. 2) Cancellation billing document types: : A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type has the right VBTYP.

Invoice G2 .Invoice Source OR . MM & FI Get help for your SAP SD problems Do you have a SAP SD Question? SAP SD Books SAP Sales and Distribution.Debit Memo F1 .g. After that use transaction VCHECKTVCPF to check your Copy control customizing.Invoice Deliveries in VTFL e. you let the rest of the settings remains as SAP defaults.g. Certification.V_TVFSP.Debit Memo F2 .Your Delivery Usually for copy control.Invoice ZOR . Related Topics: Integration between SD.Your Sales Order Billing documents in VTFF e. G2 . You only assign the new Billing Document Types.Standard Sales Order ZOR . F1 . F1 .Delivery F1 .Invoice F1 . Interview Questions Reference Books SAP Sales and Distribution Tips SAP SD Discussion Forum and Sales/Distribution Tips Billing Block will not worked if you did not assign it Define the possible block indicators in SM30 .Invoice LF . . MM.g.V_TVFS and allocate them to the billing types concerned in SM30 . FI Link Between SAP SD.Sales documents in VTFA Target e.

You can auto block by :1. 3.V_TFPLA_TY. for milestone billing. Maintain billing plan types for milestone billing in OVBO. 4.V_TVAP. which type of plan The type of billing plan that is determined at this point is set up in Customizing and cannot be changed in the sales document. Maintain date proposal for Billing Plan Type in OVBM. you must be able to enter data to identify the individual milestones. Billing plans for periodic billing and milestone billing plans for projectrelated milestone billing have different overview screens so that you can enter data relevant to your processing.Your Billing Block will not worked if you did not assigned it to the desired billing types. the system determines from the item category whether a billing plan is required and. For example. Define date description in SM30 . or 2. Billing Plan for Milestone Billing Milestone billing means distributing the total amount to be billed over multiple billing dates in the billing plan. the customer is billed either a percentage of the entire project cost or simply a pre-defined amount. sales document type in transaction VOV8. . fields Billing Block. by filling the fields Billing Block. IMG configuration requires :1.V_TVTB. item categories in SM30 . Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type IN OVBJ. if so. Allocate date category in SM30 . 5. As each milestone is successfully reached. During sales order processing. 2.

000 30. Define rules for determining the date in OVBS. proceed as follows: In one of the overview screens of the sales document.000 30. Delivery-relevant order items for which a milestone billing plan applies are billed on the basis of the requested delivery quantity and not on the total of the confirmed quantities.000 30.6. Each schedule item can be assigned to a network in a project. In the SAP R/3 System. Each milestone-related billing date is blocked for processing until the Project System confirms that the milestone is completed.000 Billing Block x x x Milestone x x x x Billing x . To display the project-related data for a schedule line.000 Billing Plan Billing date Status 01-10-94 01-03-95 01-04-95 01-05-95 Description Contract Assembly Maintenance Acceptance % 10 30 30 30 Value 10. 7. milestones are defined in a network along with planned and actual dates for the completion of work. Assign Billing Plan Type to Sales Documents Type in OVBP. The milestones are also assigned to the billing dates in the billing plan. Such projects often include a series of milestones that mark the completion of different stages of the work. select 1. such as plant engineering and construction projects. The following figure shows an example of milestone billing where only the Contract have been billed : Order Item Turbine 100. 2. Assign Billing Plan Type to Item Categories in OVBR. Item -> Schedule lines. Mark the schedule line and select Procurement details. Milestone billing is typically used for billing projects. 8. The connection between the project and the sales document item is made in the individual schedule lines of the item.

01-06-95 Final invoice . you control how the system automatically creates the schedule of dates in a billing plan. The system determines the amount to be billed either from the condition records that are applicable to the item or from the values that are explicitly entered in the billing plan . Pricing Sales document items are billed as each billing date in the plan becomes due. The system determines the schedule of individual dates based on general date information. This general date information is copied either from contract header data or from proposals in the billing plan type. updated with the actual date of the milestone.. if the date is earlier than the planned billing date for the date Explain what is Billing Plan. always updated with the actual date of the milestone 3. x Network/Activities Milestone Assembly Maintenance Acceptance Estimate 01-03-95 01-04-95 01-05-95 Actual 01-03-95 For each billing date in a milestone billing plan. such as the start and end dates. fixed 2.. Billing plan processing includes the following functions: y y y y y y y y y y y Automatic creation of billing plan dates Pricing Billing block Billing index Billing status Billing rule for milestone billing Fixed dates in milestone billing Document flow Creating with reference Exchange rate determination Automatic Creation of Billing Plan Dates In Customizing for Sales. . you can specify whether the billing date is: 1.

Billing block A billing block can be set for each date in a billing plan. In milestone billing. the system automatically sets a billing block for each billing date. Billing status The system assigns a billing status to each billing date in the plan. The price differences can be taken into account during final settlement. you must enter it manually during processing. In milestone billing. the system copies this information into the index. you can specify a percentage to be billed or an actual amount. After billing has been carried out successfully. the billing status is automatically set to µC¶. you can specify that the amount to be billed is a final settlement that takes into account billing that has not yet been processed.for a particular billing date. for example. Final settlement is not automatically proposed in the billing plan by the system. This block remains in effect until the project system reports back that the milestone in the corresponding network has been successfully completed. For example. you can specify whether the billing amount is a percentage of the total amount or whether it is a fixed amount. The rule determines how the billing amount for the particular date is calculated. If a billing date is blocked for billing. price changes may take place after billing dates in the plan have already been processed. Billing Rule for Milestone Billing For every date in the milestone billing plan. In addition. The block prevents processing for a particular billing date but does not necessarily affect any of the other dates in the plan. Billing index For every billing date in a plan. Fixed dates in milestone billing . The status indicates to what extent the billing has been processed for that particular date. For example. you can specify a billing rule. the system creates and updates a billing index. This prevents a billed date from being billed again. At this point the system removes the block.

If. then the system uses the exchange rate used for invoice creation and it is forwarded to FI. The amount billed is the amount determined after using this exchange rate to convert from the local currency into the document currency. if necessary. Exchange rate determination In the billing plan with partial billing. This fixed rate is valid for all dates in the item billing plan for which no rate is specified in the billing plan. If no exchange rate is entered for the the date or at item level. for example. When using a header billing plan. If an exchange rate is entered both for the date in the billing plan and at item level in the exchange rate field. then the system uses the rate specified for the date during billing. you can store a certain exchange rate for each date. this is automatically copied to the corresponding dates for the item billing plans. the system updates the document flow for the corresponding sales document item. . The document flow for the sales document displays the following data: Creation date Billing date Billed value y y y Creating with reference When you define a billing plan type in Customizing for Sales. An exchange rate can also be stored at item level for the sales document (field: Exchange rate for FI on the Billing tab page. you enter an exchange rate manually for the first date in the header billing plan. whether the date is fixed or whether the system copies the date from the planned or actual milestone dates in a project. Document flow After a particular date in a billing plan is processed for billing. During sales order processing for items that require billing plans. the system automatically proposes the reference plan and. you can enter the number of an existing billing plan to serve as a reference during subsequent billing plan creation. all billing plans linked to this header billing plan are automatically updated.You can control for each date in a billing plan. re-determines the billing dates (based on the current date rules) for inclusion in the new billing plan.

default data. Martishev Sabir Thank you for your reply. Create a modification of copy control routine for billing and use VBAP-PSTYV as an additional split criteria there.) In VF06 or background: variant with parametrization) to avoid an unwanted split due to the billing date.is it possible? Naina Yes.g. Can you please tell me the exact steps what should I add under that(additional split criteria).Invoice split criteria in billing document 36832 . there select your item categories and there select the field VBRK/VBRP data. the current date) must be entered (In VF04 : settings. This OSS notes is very helpful :11162 . With the help of your ABAP guy create a copy of that routine under a different number and add your lines of code. I mean If in sales order there is TAN and TANN then the invoice should split.Invoice split in fields from the sales order Billing Spilt by Item Category Is it possible to split invoice Item category wise. .SAP Billing . it is possible.Combine Billing for deliveries with different date When using transaction VF04 or Billing (background). FORM DATEN_KOPIEREN_001. In that field you will see the currently used routine. Naina In trx VTFA (if your billing is sales order based) choose your billing type and SO type. the date of the billing document (e. Let's say you use routine 001.

... ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG. MODUL(3) VALUE '001'.... ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART....... ZUK-PSTYV = VBAP-PSTYV.....New line END OF ZUK.. ENDFORM. ENDFORM..New line VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK.. VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG. MODUL(3) VALUE '001'.... <.. .. * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK... END OF ZUK. VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK. * Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = .. This is how it should look after modification: * Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = . * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK.... SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART. SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART...* Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = .... * Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = .. <..... VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG. ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG.. PSTYV LIKE VBAP-PSTYV. ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART....

order accounting).g. " How could this error be solved as none of your invoices are getting accounted in FI? To overcome this. By "prepaid . the corresponding accounting document is not created. sales. logistics. F5 727 If you hit the above erros when you create an invoice in SD. Martishev Sabir Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no. The error is as follows: Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no. System response FI documents have a 3-digit item counter that limits the number of items permitted per document. the only way was to break the accounting invoices. F5 727 Diagnosis The maximum number of items for an FI document ('999') has been exceeded. Procedure If the documents with an excessive number of items come from another application area (e. you can configure the system to the effect that these documents are summarized in FI. 1 with 950 items and the other with the rest. Prepaid process possible -----Original Message----Subject: Prepaid process possible I am looking for information on how we could implement a prepaid process.After this routine is created and activated place it as the default copy control routine instead of the old ones.

Once we have received his payment.process" I mean: .no further billing document is produced.We post the payment we received earlier against this last invoice. I found information in online documentation about "down payments" (I imagine that our prepaid process could be a 100% required down payment) but it does not seem that it would work. we produce an invoice for him to pay . As you see. This can be done also with item category groups (can be used to determine what default item category that . anybody have any hints? -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Prepaid process possible Hi again! You are right! However. There most be a more efficient way to handle this. we release the sales order for delivery and produce the invoices. It is also possible to code a user exit so that only certain customers will get the prepaid process. What we do now: .Once we receive the payment. which implies the processing is "material" specific not "customer" specific. we release the sales order for delivery . . you can select what item category (and process) to use at order entry.We receive the sales orders and produce a Pro Forma invoice from it. .If customer is set as "prepaid". and send it to customer . This risk category automatically block the sales order for delivery.We have defined a risk category "prepaid" which is assigned to our prepaid customer. From what I understood it looks like the billing plan is handled based upon the item category.Customer sends to us his order . this requires a lot of manual work and a lot of time is wasted to match all documents together. if you create a new item category for the prepaid scenario.

Check copy control from sales document to billing document for the new item category.should appear). 3. Now you should be able to create a sales order with the new distribution channel where the new item category is defaulted. and item category group defaulting the new item category. Also delivery copy control could be good to check. Extend your material(s) with views for the new distribution channel and enter the "ZXXX" item category group in the field for sales item category group (I think it is on sales 2 screen but I am not sure. can't access a system right now). If not check the completion rule in the new item category. Good luck . add or check entries so that you have the order type used. and enter the "prepaid item category group in the sales item category group field in material master. Create a new distribution channel and assign it to the company structure (plant. (Change the billing in the item category to order related billing with no billing plan) 2. Check that the sales order is completed when both billing and goods issue for the delivery is posted. Create a new item category group "ZXXX" or something of your choice with the description "Prepaid" or something like that. This would mean that you either have different materialnumbers for the different processes or use different distribution channels in the sales order. Here is a proposal of customizing activities to achieve this: 1. In item category assignment. 4. Create a new item category as a copy of the normal item category used for nonprepaid sales. 5. DC 10 could be the normal process and DC 20 the prepaid process. Then you need to create the sales views in material master for DC 20 for all materials that should be possible to run in the prepaid scenario. sales org etc) 6.

However. or Go to SPRO>>>IMG>>>Sales & Distribution>>>Billing>>>Billing Documents>>>Country-specific features>>>Maintain Maximum No. Of Billing Items. Then. Next. thereby causing invoicing of the desired. SAP SD Tips by : Amol Document Not Relevant For Billing How to resolve "Document not relevant for billing" error message? Check the detailed error log in VF01 screen. But our client want to restrict number items to 8 (max) in an invoice. . go to that Item Category functionality VOV7 and find if it is order or delivery related billing. You can restrict delivery with delivery tolerance. check have you completed the PGI for the delivery document or not.-----End of Message----- Restricting Number Of Items In Billing Doc How I can restrict number of items in an invoice? If I enter more than 8 items in a sales order and those items get copied into delivery doc then to billing doc. This is where you can define a maximum number of items allowed for all billing documents within a given sales organization. maintaining data here is not enough alone to bring about a billing split by number of billing items. You must also go to copying control for order/delivery to billing document at item level under "Data VBRK/VBRP" and maintain routine 006 "individual invoice limited" or a similar routine that accesses the data maintained here. We may get more information on error.

else Sales Order creation will give error. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area. such as Inquiry. If possible use standard sales order. Incase if required to create new.And after that go and check in the particular Sales order document type whether billing document types are maintained in the sales document or not. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. go VTFL and check in your document type combination is maintained or not. go VTFA If it Delivery related. Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. B. etc. *2. 2. Sales Document Item: *1. Assign Item Categories: If possible. Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. After delivery while creating billing document system showing error that no billing document is generated for material no 395. . So how I can solve this issue. always copy as with reference to similar sales order. use standard. To create new sales order type. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. copy as from standard & maintain New. If every thing is correct go and find with copy controls If it order related. if they are maintained item category is available or not. Sales Order. Sales Document Type:The sales document types represent the different business transactions. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category. Check if Item Category is checked for Billing or not. 3. copy as from standard & maintain New. Quotation. Normal Sales Order Cycle:Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1. Incase if required to create new.

copy as from standard & maintain New. Incase if required to create new. Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. Incase if required to create new. Procedure To Cancel Billing Documents ERP SAP ==> SD SAP Tickets from users: After the following process: Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing. the billing document will be passed on to the FI consultants. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1. *3. copy as from standard & maintain New. copy as from standard & maintain New. use standard. Note: Ensure that Copy Control settings are done Sales Order to Sales Order (QT --> OR): VTAA Sales Order to Delivery (OR --> LF): VTLA Sales Order to Billing (OR --> F1): VTFA Delivery to Billing(LF --> F2): VTFL Billing to Sales Order (F2 --> RE): VTAF The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. But if there is a .2. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > *1. Deliver to Billing. Incase if required to create new. 2. etc. Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. 3. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible. *2. what happens if there is a cancellation? How to perform cancellation for this process: Billing --> Goods receipt --> Sales Order ? (Is this the correct reversal to perform in order for cancellation?) After performing the process Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing.

cancellation then. and reject the order. Once the delivery is deleted. this billing doc. then that sales order number doesn't exist in the database and you cant create another sales order with the same order number 1055. First you need to cancel the billing document using T-code VF11. In the FI customer open line items. Cancellation of billing . 1056. the order will get closed. When you create another sales order the number will skip to the next one i. the sales order will be open. For example . Match Billing Cancel Document How to find out the link between the original and cancelled billing documents? Goto to tcode SE16 Table: VBRK . Now you need to cancel the Post goods Issue using VL09. After deletion / cancellation of that sales order that order doesn't exist in the database. You can only reject the Sales order if there are existing transations: 1.VF11 Cancellation of delivery . It is not advicable delete a sales order.VL09 Then go to VL02N and remove the picking qty and make it blank then Goto VA02 and cancel the order. 2. the delete the delivery using VL02N.e. so it will reverse all the updated accounting entries. once it is reversed. which will have a accounting document also that will also get cancelled. 3. Now put a reason for rejection in the line item/s. You can delete the Sales Order if transaction have been done: In VA02 . if your sales order number is 1055 and you have deleted or cancelled that sales order. just enter into the sales order goto menu path -> Files-> Cancel or delete option will be there will be there.

e. and save it. goto VF04. with out any saving of each and every billing document. In the ABAP Progamme Name give SDBILLDL.Now Click on GOTO -> Variant -> Save as Variant. And you can also see all the billing documents numbers. this is used to do batch job.. Select all the deliveries which you want to create billing documents. Schedule VF04 For Individual Billing Run SAP Functional ==> SD In SAP How to schedule billing to be run automatically? You can create individual Billing documents in VF04. (this is the programme used to create billing documents) continue to give the specified time which you want to run this batch job. . just you need to give your variant name. after an hour.g. test.Field: VBRK-ZUONR . goto SM36. in SD Document field. or a specific day like so. then once you comple this process. give delivery 1 to 10.g. using JOB WIZARD. click on Job Wizard which is on the screen. if you dont know any thing also. then it will take you to another screen. 2. if you mentioned as immediately. No need to select single delivery each time. proceed for the following process 1. and billing documents will be created. Then all the deliveries will go for billing individually in a single run. If you want to do a batch job for billing. give the variant name. like immediate. now you batch job will run at a specified time which you mentioned.. which are created. for which you want to create billing documents e. in the selection screen Delivery document range. 3. 4. Continue further to complete the task.Assignment (this field link the original and cancelled billing documents) Cancel billing documents must be successfuly released to accounting. 5. using Cntr Button. and click on individual billing. (in job name field) (in the first screen) the continue for further steps. your vairant will run. you can do the entire process. It will take you to different steps. Usually it failed when user tried to cancelled current period with previous date.

Dynamic Item Processor (DIP) profile is used for the resource related billing. Milestone billing can be used for this type of billing purposes when you want to have billing control from the project. LIPS etc and the created billing documents are stored in tables VBRK. meaning there is no billing block or any thing. It reads tables like VBAK. VBRP. Difference between the RSNAST00 and SDBILLDL program. VBUK.code ODP1) 2) Specify the usage (i) Billing & Result Analysis (RRB) . You can check the status of your batch job using t. Using this program. The same program is customised for each applications using programs like SD70AV1A which are also used for the same purpose but only for sales orders. SDBILLDL is the program for Billing due list. RSNAST00 is a program which is related to output related activities. VBUP. VBAP. The details are read and stored in the database table NAST. Plese ensure that all the deliveries are perfect. email etc) in total for any document created in any of the applications. we can schedule the creation of outputs (PDFs. This program finds out all the orders or deliveries or both which are due for billing and it will trigger the billing creation. LIKP. In what kind of business scenario do we use it? and what are the settings required to use it? Periodic billing is used when you want to bill the customer at different points of time based on the periodicity or progress of the work.6. Resource billing is based on the resource consumption for the particular activities. code SM37. Explain The Concept of Resource Related Billing Please explain to me the concept of resource related billing and its different between periodic and milestone. Steps to be followed: 1) Configure DIP Profile (T.

IX-057: No cost management is provided for sales document (contract) item.(ii) Request Quotation (Sales Pricing) 3) Specify (i) Sales Document Type (PS2) (ii) SD Doc Type CMR 4) In Sales Order Type --> Sales Order Category . eg--> Activity Type 7) Then define sources. In the material master costing view.code CJ20N) 14) Create Sales Order (T. Now in Activity Type -> Mention the activity type 9) If more activity type are being used then create set of activity type using T. (We can also use cost element. This is usually because there is no requirements type assigned to the contract item (see procurement tab).code VA01) 15) Book CATS 16) Execute DP91 to view Sales Pricing Common Errors: AD01-155: Error during material determination for sales document item. Go back to the service order and check there are actual costs . Select "Actual Cost" as we use actual cost for RRB. No material appears in DMR/CMR. set the "Material Origin" checkbox (see OSS note 174382) No expenditure item found. Define% 8) Sources --> Selection Criteria: This would display all characteristics.In criteria allocate the activity type for the specific material."L" (Debit Memo Request) 5) Document Pricing Procedure --> PS (Customer Project) 6) Select the billing usage and click on characteristics. Material Origin field was not checked in the Costing tab of the material master.code GS01 10) Material Determination --> Initially create material with "Material Type = Service" 11) The service material should be mentioned in the material determination 12) Criteria -. which we have defined in characteristics) 13) Create Project (T. cost center.

First Scenario Your accounting document not generated. check cost element category is 43 KA03: Check if Record qty flag is set on Indicators tab KA03: Check cost element assigned to your controlling area KP26: Check that activity type is linked to cost centre KP26: Check that there is a rate for the activity type/cost centre KP26: Check are you using the correct version Cancelled Billing Document Has No Accounting Document Real SD Support Question: I have cancelled a billing document through vf11. So once you cancel the billing document it will create one cancellation Document and one reversal Accounting Document.Check your DIP Profile. CO Configuration: KL03: Check activity type validity dates KA03: Check cost element validity dates KA03: For labour. There is no need to cancel Accounting document which is created after cancel a billing document. 1. . you are actually creating a cancellation document. specifically the sources section to ensure you are not filtering out any dynamic items. VF02 Mode Click ³Release to Accounting" the Accounting documents not generated. Where to checked? When you cancel a billing document. That means the cancellation billing document did not generate accounting document. The cancellation document copies data from the billing document and transfers an offsetting entry to the accounting department. Lets handle it phase by phase.

then OK Else 3. If it has not generated the accounting document then check the settings in OBA7 Retro Billing And Self-Billing Are retro billing and Self-billing referring to the same process? Answer: . Check with FI Consultant whether Accounting entries has been posted with reference to customer and Invoice. Then check Posting Block. 5. Check with FI Consultant. Check Account assignment Procedure VKOA and check G/L account has been assigned. Finally check whether the billing document which you were cancelling that billing document generated accounting document or not. If it has been checked then uncheck it and secondly also check in the F2 billing document type whether S1 cancellation billing document type has been assigned or not. 4. This you can see in the document flow. If yes. Second Scenario If accounting documents gets generated and you use VF11 to Cancel the invoice. Please Check this : SPRO--->Sales and Distribution-->Billing Documents-->Define Billing Types Select Billing type S1. Check Whether you have assigned Accounting keys to the relevant condition types.2. it should be unchecked. then automatically the posting document gets reversed and separate number will be assigned for those documents. If error found correct it Else 6. Check whether for the S1 billing document type Posting block has been checked or not.

Customer may send a self-bill for the above case like $80 a piece.f Sep 01. system will provide you the list of candidate invoices to which this price reduction is applicable and hence you can simulate or even execute retro-billing after providing Cr/Dr memo type and order reason. You will execute retro-billing process. SELF-BILLING Here customer raises invoices for itself. You will go to VFRB and enter the selection criteria for the material and suitable dates. Let me explain using a very simple example: You sell 10 units of a material A for $100 per unit . system will generate a credit memo of $200 for the customer and a debit memo for same amount with reference ?_?_?.Amount $1000 Invoice is sent to customer for $1000 on say Sep 20.Retro billing and Self-billing are entirely different processes and can be executed independently. Now the customer while paying will pay $800 as per its self-bill and the same would be settled against original invoice of $1000 and SB credit Memo of $200. 2099.e. On processing. Thus you will update your price conditions in VK12 for this material/customer to $90 with validity from Sep 01.you must maintain the 'use of order reason for retro-billing' in Order reasons configuration for this to work properly. Supplier does not send the invoice to customer. 2099. But as you have already invoiced the customer in past so to take care of the extra billing . 2099 RETRO-BILLING Now due to price negotiations price may change to $90 w. This will hit the supplier system in form of EDI/Fax/Paper etc and on verification in system will show in Self-bill Monitor VSB1n. These documents will get attached to the original invoice Important to Note . Other debit memo of $200 (with ?_?_? reference) will remain open in system which may be .

' enter the exchange rate there manually. The billing document will be posted to the accounting after getting the money from the customer and the exchange rate will become something else at this moment also. the exchange rate will be something else.currency <-> Doc. Exchange Rate Billing Documents In SAP billing process.currency.rate-acct. if the sales order is MTO and goods will dispatched after 2 months and within these 2 month the exchange rate got floated by a large amount and during the billing with VF01 t-code. For FI postings If there is a manual entry in the sales order field VBKD-KURRF (Goto -> Header -> . It will solve the problem as it will give me the billing amount in exact LC amount also.cleared off by a retro billing run where supplier may reduce the price by $20 or take further action as needed. Is there is any provision in sap system so that I can change the exchange rate in the billing document and with this same exchange rate I can post the entries in accounting also. In the billing document there are 3 exchange rates. I am facing the problem with the exchange rate.currency <-> Doc. please review: VBRP-KURSK Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc. for Price Determination The determination of this exchange rate depends on the setting of TVCPFLP-PFKUR in customizing copy-control VBRK-KURRF Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc.currency. if you want that same exchange rate to be in Accounting document in Sales Order GOTO -> HEADER -> ACCOUNTING there one field is there 'Exch. Solution: You can have the same exchange rate (OB08) in sales order to be in billing document: In Copy control VTFL at item category level -> PricingExchRate type to 'A'Copy from sales order Now. As the rates picked in the sales order as default exchange rates maintained for the day. and I can¶t change it at that instance also. which will post to accounting. and make a large difference of amount at this instance.

See the OSS note 36070.to date of services rendered How To Do Configuration For Credit Management Credit and risk management takes place in the credit control area. then it is copied in the subsequent billing document. An organizational unit that represents the area where customer credit is awarded and monitored. decentralized. It is always determined according to the Pricing date. KOMV-KKURS Exchange Rate for the conversion Cond. Otherwise VBRK-KURRF is determined during invoice creation.currency <-> Loc. you can implement credit management that is centralized. . 97487. One credit control area contains credit control information for each customer.rate determination accord. if credit control is performed across several company codes.Accounting). then it is copied into VBRK-KURRF. It is supposed that manual entry has higher priority. or somewhere in between. This organizational unit can either be a single or several company codes. If the sales document has this field filled. During VF01 the system determines the Exchange rate for FI posting VBRK-KURRF from the currency tables according(OB08) to the billing date only if the field Exchange rate for FI posting is empty in the source sales document (VBKDKURRF). The choices you have are as follows: Pricing Exchange Rate Type (V_TVCPFLP-PFKUR) A Copy from sales order B Price exchange rate = Accounting rate C Exchange rate determination according to billing date D Exchange rate determination according to pricing date E Exchange rate determination according to current date F Exch. See the OSS notes 92613.currency At price condition level. The exchange rate should be based on your configuration in copy control (VTFA or VTFL) at the item category level. manually or copied from a reference invoice (by copy control routine). According to your corporate requirements. This is the standard working of the system.

For example. field "All company codes" must be marked in Transaction OB45. or the credit control area must be entered under the relevant company code in . Company code: Credit control area: 2. your credit policy requires decentralized credit management.4. Payer: Credit control area: 4. Transaction OVFL Check which credit control area is assigned to the sales area. If. Sales area: Credit control area: 3. you can define one credit control area for all of your company codes. Transaction OBZK For the settings under items 2 . The implementation guide is under Enterprise Structure -> Definition or Assignment -> Financial Accounting and then Maintain credit control area. on the other hand. The credit control area found is stored in field VBAK-KKBER. You assign customers to specific credit control areas and specify the appropriate credit limits in the customer master record. Transaction XD02 or VD02 Check which credit control area is assigned to the payer. The settings of items 1 . You set up credit control areas and other data related to credit management in Customizing for Financial Accounting. you can define credit control areas for each company code or each group of company codes. Tips by : Kapilaa Settings for determining the credit control area of a document. 1. Credit limits and credit exposure are managed at both credit control area and customer level. Transaction OB38 Check which credit control area is assigned to the company code. Transaction SE37 Is user exit EXIT_SAPV45K_001 being used? 5.4 are taken into account according to their priority. if your credit management is centralized.

Settings for the credit checks 7. the credit check status must be set (field "Status/block").table T001CM of the credit control areas allowed. Transaction OB01 Credit management/Change risk category Definition of the risk category for each credit control area. This risk category can be assigned to a credit account by using Transaction FD32. the individual credit checks for key fields o credit control area o risk category o credit group are set. 11. Company code: Credit control areas allowed: 6. Transaction OVAK Which settings do exist for the sales document type used? Sales document: Check credit: Credit group: 8. check whether fields "Reaction" and "Status/block" are set correctly. Transaction OVA8 Here. In particular. 10. Transaction FD32 Credit master data for the payer of the relevant document. To carry out follow-up actions in case of a credit block. Credit account: Credit limit: Risk category: Currency: . Take these key fields from the above settings and go to the detail screen. Transaction OVAD Which settings do exist for the delivery type used? Delivery type: Credit group for delivery: Credit group for goods issue: 9.

check whether this is fine with you. If you open an OSS message. subtotal "A" must be entered in a line for determining the credit value (mark the pricing procedure and doubleclick on "Control"). "Synchronous update (1)" has to be chosen as the kind of update. 13. This field corresponds to field "Active receivable" in Transaction VOV7. MRP block for Credit limit attained Customers . please tell us the alternative update group. All other settings will lead to errors. If you use another update group. Transaction OVA7 Update of the credit value is active for the corresponding item type if the check box is marked. Item type: Active receivable: 14. The credit price is stored in field VBAP-CMPRE and used for update and credit check. Usually. Pricing procedure: Line with subtotal = 'A': 15. Pricing In the pricing procedure used for pricing. Settings for updating the credit values Update of the credit values is required for the limit check (static or dynamic credit limit check). Transaction V/08. Transaction OB45 Which update group (field "Update") do you use in the relevant credit control area? The default setting is "12". You can find the used pricing procedure of the order under "Item -> Condition -> Analysis". Credit control area: Update: 16. This way the system is determined to use this subtotal for credit pricing.12. Transaction OMO1 Which kind of update did you choose for structure S066? In any case. the net value plus taxes is used.

. you can write a routine 903 because you only wanted this reaction for certain business units. MESSAGE I706(Z1). you may have to tweak if it doesn't work exactly as you'd like. Code: DATA: W_ZSDCRD TYPE ZSD_CREDITBLCK.Availablity. *} REPLACE *{ INSERT DEVK966908 1 *} INSERT * Read the subsequent function information for the message PERFORM FOFUN_TEXT_READ USING GL_FOFUN CHANGING FOFUN_TEXT. Try using routine 103. See in transaction "VOFM". IF W_CMGST = SPACE. You should try and use one of the standard requirements. using a routine similar to this will prevent the requirement from appearing in MD04 for orders blocked on credit. SELECT SINGLE * INTO W_ZSDCRD FROM ZSD_CREDITBLCK WHERE KKBER = VBAK-KKBER AND CTLPC = VBAK-CTLPC. Irregardless. IMPORT VBUK-CMGST TO W_CMGST FROM MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. For example. EXPORT VBUK-CMGST TO MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. ENDIF. IF SY-SUBRC = 0 AND VBUK-CMGST CA 'B'.How to block the requirement (MD04) generated by the item category in a sales order when the customer has attained the credit limit? The MRP requirements still appear even though the schedule is zero. Under Requirements / Subsequent Functions / Reqs. DATA: W_CMGST LIKE VBUK-CMGST.

Regards Swami -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Leslie Paolucci We check credit at the time of the delivery (at delivery creation and before picking) and use the blocked sales doc process/list to release them. This can be set up in customizing under risk management-> credit management.MESSAGE ID 'V1' TYPE 'E' NUMBER '849' WITH FOFUN_TEXT RAISING ERROR. Rich Dragani -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: LOG: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Swami Subramanyan Program RVKRED08? Or manually execute function module SD_ORDER_CREDIT_RECHECK. Any ideas would be appreciated. . *{ INSERT DEVK966908 2 *} INSERT ENDIF. Does anyone know how I can automatically re-execute a dynamic credit check a few days prior to shipment for future dated sales orders. Do you have a SAP SD Question? Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking -----Original Message----Subject: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Richard Dragani Hi credit experts. ENDFORM.

You need to check couple of settings like: 1. in fd32customer credit management change . Your customer should be assigned the credit control area. after creating the delivery . the bill value is appearing in 'receivables' but the amount in 'sales value' is not getting reduced.6b. In your Item Category Credit should be active. can anyone tell the missing link? thanking in advance -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi. we are going for credit management but facing one problem.the sales value feild in not getting updated after creating the billing. but when i am going for billing (delivery related). because of this the credit exposure is increasing continuously. eg. -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing .the order value get updated in the sales value in fd32.-----End of Reply Message----- Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing -----Original Message----Subject: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing we are on 4.that value remains same in the feild of sales value. update group for corrosponding credit ctrl area is 12. when i create the order . also the item is mark for credit update. 2. Regards.

10. Doc. Eg: Customer Credit Limit is Rs. In automatic check.000/Here credit limit exceeds then system reacts. deliveries and billing documents are updated. It should be '000012'. Billed & Transfered to FI. Options : A) Warning Message B) Error Message (Sales Order won't be saved) C) Error Message with Delivery Block .Value + Open Item Value is Rs. Have fun -----End of Message----- Difference Between Simple and Automatic Credit Check Types Explain in detail difference between simple and automatic credit check types.customer is assign to concorn CCA and item category is mark for credit active -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi.00. The credit update group controls when the values of open sales orders.Value : Sales Order Has been saved but not delivered Open Item : Sales Order has been saved .Code . Further also refer to the OSS note 18613.Value + Open Items. but not received the payment from the customer.FD32 It Considers the Doc.000/Suppose Doc. SIMPLE CREDIT CHECK : Tr.1. Check the credit update group in the transaction OB45. difference between static and dynamic checks.1. Delivered.

3Months Here the System will not consider the above 1.Value / Sales Order Value : Which is save but not delievered 2) Open Delivery Doc. STATIC CREDIT LIMIT DETERMINATION :Checking Group + Risk Catageory + Credit Control Area.Value : Which is delivered but not billed 3) Open Billing Doc.AUTOMATIC CREDIT CHECK : Give extra credit facilities to the particular customer.Value : Which is billed but not posted to FI 4) Open Item : Which is transfered to FI but not received from the customer. 01) Sales 02) Deliveries 03) Goods Issue At all the above 3 levels orders can be blocked. A) Credit Checking Groups : Types of Checking Groups.3& 4 values for the lost 3 months Then assign the Sales Doc & Del Documents.2. HIGH RISK (0001) : LOW CREDIT LOW RISK (0002) : MORE CREDIT MEDIUM RISK(0003) : Average Credit Static Credit Check it checks all these doc value & check with the credit limit 1) Open Doc.Type(OR) + credit Check(0) + Credit Group (01) . B) Risk Catageory : Based on the risk catageories company decide how much credit has to give to the customer. Sales Doc. DYNAMIC CREDIT CHECK : 1) Open Doc 2) Open Delivery 3) Open Billing 4) Open Items 5) Horizon Period = Eg.

risk categories and document . create a subtotal line to store the value of the price plus any sales tax. Make the following entries: Sub to: ³A´ Reqt: ³2´ AltCTy: ³4´ Automatic Credit Checking Transaction: OVA8 Tables: T691F Action: Select each combination of credit control areas.Credit Limit Check for Delivery Type : Del. The Update Group should be µ00012¶.Type (LF) + Del Credit Group (02) + Goods Issue Credit Group (03) Set Up for Credit Card Payment Processing Given below is the set up for credit card payment processing: Set Up Credit Control Areas: Define Credit Control Area Transaction: OB45 Tables: T014 Action: Define a credit control area and its associated currency. This entry is required so the sales order will calculate the value to authorize Assign Company Code to Credit Control Area Transaction: OB38 Tables: T001 Action: Assign a default credit control area for each company code Define Permitted Credit Control Area for a Company Code Transaction: Tables: T001CM Action: For each company code enter every credit control area that can be used Identify Credit Price Transaction: V/08 Tables: T683S Action: Towards the end of the pricing procedure. after all pricing and tax determination.

Define Customer Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: T691P Action: Define a flag to be stored in table. Determine Payment Guarantee Procedure Transaction: OVFJ . You need to mark the field ³no Credit Check´ with the valid number for sales documents. Create Customer Payment Guarantee = ³Payment Card Payment Cards (All Customers can use Payment Cards)´. Set Up Payment Guarantees Define Forms of Payment Guarantee Transaction: OVFD Tables: T691K Action: R/3 is delivered with form ³02´ defined for payment cards. Define Sales Document Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: T691R Action: Define the flag that will be associated with sales document types that are relevant for payment cards Assign Sales Document Payment Guarantee Flag Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Assign the document flag type the sales documents types that are relevant for payment cards. the only other entry should be ³3´ in the column labeled ³PymtGuaCat´ Define Payment Guarantee Procedure Transaction: Tables: T691M/T691O Action: Define a procedure and a description. Forms of Payment Guarantee and make the following entries Sequential Number ³1´ Payment Guarantee Form ³02´ Routine Number ³0´ Routine Number can be used to validate payment card presence.types for which credit checking should be bypassed. Other than the descriptor.

Get the card number ranges from user community. Create the following two entries Cat Description One Card Additional Data CC Credit Cards No-check No-check PC Procurement Cards No-check Check Determine Card Categories Transaction: Tables: TVCTD Action: For each card category map the account number range to a card category. We created our own routine. Multiple ranges are possible for each card category or a masking technique can be used. Mastercard. . *****SAP does not deliver a card check for Discover Card. Below is just a sample of what I am aware are the different types of cards. Define Card Categories Transaction: Tables: TVCTY Action: Define the card category to determine if a payment card is a credit card or a procurement card.Tables: T691U Action: Combine the Customer flag and the sales document flag to derive the payment guarantee procedure Payment Card Configuration Define Card Types Transaction: Tables: TVCIN Action: Create the different card types plus the routine that validates the card for length and prefix (etc«) Visa . American Express. and Discover Create the following entries for each payment card AMEX American Express ZCCARD_CHECK_AMEX Month DC Discover Card ZCCARD_CHECK_DC Month***** MC Mastercard ZCCARD_CHECK_MC Month VISA Visa ZCCARD_CHECK_VISA Month The Routines can be created based on the original routines delivered by SAP.

Visa Credit Expires in 7 days. 405501 405504 405550 405554 415928 415928 424604 424605 427533 427533 428800 428899 Mastercard Credit Expires in 30 days 500000 540499 540600 554999 557000 599999 Mastercard Procurement Expires in 30 days 540500 540599 555000 556999 American Express Credit Expires in 30 days 340000 349999 370000 379999 Discover Card Credit Expires in 30 days 601100 601199 Set Sales Documents to accept Payment Card Information Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Review the listing of Sales Document types and enter ³03´ in the column labeled ³PT´ for each type which can accept a payment card Configuration for Authorization Request Maintain Authorization Requirements Transaction: OV9A Tables: TFRM Action: Define and activate the abap requirement that determines when an . 400000 405500 405505 405549 405555 415927 415929 424603 424606 427532 427534 428799 428900 471699 471700 499999 Visa Procurement Expires in 7 days.

Assign Checking Group to Sales Document Transaction: Tables: TVAK Action: Assign the checking group to the sales order types relevant for payment cards Define Authorization Validity Periods Transaction: Tables: TVCIN Action: For each card type enter the authorization validity period in days. A horizon This is the days in the future SAP will use to determine the value to authorize (Insight does not use auth horizon period). PreAu If checked R/3 will request an authorization for a . AuthReq Routine 901 is set here. VBUK.authorization is sent. Define Checking Group Transaction: Tables: CCPGA Action: Define a checking group and enter the description. and VBUP). VBAP. One for A/R reconciliation purposes and one for credit card clearing. Then follow the below guidelines for the remaining fields to be filled. Valid You will get warning message if the payment card is expiring within 30 days of order entry date. VBKD.01 and the authorization will be flagged as such. AMEX American Express 30 DC Discover card 30 MC Master card 30 VISA Visa 7 Configuration for clearing houses Create new General Ledger Accounts Transaction: FS01 Tables: Action: Two General Ledger accounts need to be created for each payment card type. (Insight does not use pre-authorization check). Note that the following tables are available to be used in the abap requirement (VBAK. Maintain Condition Types Transaction: OV85 .

Enter Merchant ID¶s Transaction: Tables: TCCM Action: Create the merchant id¶s that the company uses to process payment cards Assign merchant id¶s Transaction: Tables: TCCAA Action: Enter the merchant id¶s with each clearinghouse account SAP SD Tips by : Radhakrishna Srinivas Dunning Process In Credit Management Explain about dunning process in credit management? Let me explain in simple terms: . Authorization and Settlement Control Transaction: Tables: TCCAA Action: Define the general ledger accounts for reconciliation and clearing and assign the function modules for authorization and settlement along with the proper RFC destinations for each.Tables: T685 Action: Define a condition type for account determination and assign it to access sequence ³A001´ Define account determination procedure Transaction: OV86 Tables: T683 / T683S Action: Define procedure name and select the procedure for control. Enter the condition type defined in the previous step. Assign account determination procedure Transaction: Tables: Action: Determine which billing type we are using for payment card process.

after getting veridict. you may proceed for auction of his property or as per the order for Law. there will be no further supply to the customer.Dunning frequency .Texts for the dunning notices In SAP. there is very bad debt with this customer and need to recover from him and till then. you will file a law suit against the customer for recovering the Payments. he is doing good business and supplied material on Credit of 45 days. b) In case customer doesnt respond. the definition of Dunning procedure is a pre-defined procedure specifying how customers or vendors are dunned.1) You have a Customer which you had felt. sending street rowdies for recovering the bad debts from users. you have not managed Credit Checks as well. like: a) We will send a normal payment reminder. inorder to recover any bad debts. sometime back. Tips by : Kumar What do you mean by credit exposure? .Number of dunning levels . 3) One fine day you got realised that. we will send at least further reminder (dunning notice) may be 9 times (9 reminders) (Dunning level) and what intervels of time (dunning frequency) c) Still if the customer doesnt resopond for the reminders. 4) Your company's legal department has laid a policy that. Now in SAP. the user defines . Remember Reliance. For each procedure. 2) Since this customer is good as you felt.Amount limits . That is dunning. he had comfortably reached to the fullest credit (or even more) which you can afford for any customer. So. Referring to this your SD Team / FI Team (user team) will effect Dunning PS: You might remembered the dunning procedure laid by Relaince Mobile. you will not forget dunning forever. you will maintain the Dunning Procedure at customer master. d) Finally.

In credit management if the customer¶s credit limit is 10000 and credit exposure is 9900 then customer can only be able to buy now worth of 100 only. Is this correct? I think in case of 000015 Open sales order values should not be considered. What role exposure play in the credit management process. 1.updated at Delivery 000018 . Surely you must run report RVKRED77 (Note 400311 .They are the transactions with a customer that are relevant for credit limits on a specified date. 000012 . If you have bad data run the reorganization program through SE38. The credit exposure is updated based on the update algorithm assigned to the credit control area.Collection of consulting notes: Credit update and related.updated at Sales Order 000015 .RVKRED77: Reorganization credit data. For reporting purpose. If Update=000012 in CCAr then on creating Sales Order. then also on creating Sales Order. How is credit exposure calculated (seen in FD32)? It¶s simple summation of Receivables + Special liabilities (like down payments.updated at Billing To look at only Receivables for a customer look in FD32. Check Note 425523 . 3. where we can get customer credit exposure which showing in FD32. advance) + Sales value 2. It¶s the credit exposure which should not crossed over the credit limit. the exposure increases by SO value. . But if update=000015. the exposure increases by SO value. new documentation and related will help you). I mean does the system match the value of credit exposure with credit limit to find that it is exceeded or it does it differently? Credit exposure is in fact the main player.

Excise code number. .code F.JINFAC (Sales from manufacturing plants) . you maintain excise registration IDs.Go to t.The maximum number of items to be printed on each excise invoice .JINSTK (Stock transfers CIN: IMG > Logistics . and cess) Fields for any taxes that are not covered will be hidden in transactions involving excise duty.Whether you are allowed partial CENVAT credits Maintain Registration ID NUMBER. but if you check on screen. . Excise Duty plays a vital role in manufacturing cenario¶s.Enter each of your excise registrations. Excise related configuration is known as CIN configuration. you maintain the data relating to your excise registrations. Some info on CIN Configuration (it may not appear as understandable below.For each excise registration in your business create a registration ID.Which taxes the registration covers (additional excise duty. You create one ID for each of your business's excise registrations.General > Tax on Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Maintain Excise Registrations In this IMG activity. and state: . specifying a four-character code for each Excise Registration Ids In this activity.JINEXP (Export sales) . .JINDEP (Sales from depots) . it will be understood better) Country Version India comes with four pricing procedures as follows: . and also you can use s_ALR_8701212218 to overview the credit exposure. CIN Configuration is a topic in itself. excise registration number . SAP SD CIN Configuration By Shesagiri What is CIN? CIN Means Country India Version In Indian Taxing procedure.31 for an overview of the credit exposure. special excise duty.

This information is also shown when you post the vendor's excise invoice. AED usage Additional Excise duty Percentage. In this IMG activity. you maintain the data relating to your company codes. and adds the nondeductible duty to the material value. Document Type for CENVAT Postings. Dependencies . Here ED is document type for cenvat posting. Excise Registration Number: A number assigned to each premises or location that has registered as a manufacturer with the excise authorities.ECC Number: Specifies the organization's ECC number. Indicator for confirming. . Excise register set description: Description of the excise registers set. Every entity with an excise registration number is required to keep its own excise books. Similarly for SED CESS Number of Items in Excise Invoice Shows the maximum number of line items that the authorities allow per excise invoice.Additional Excise duty is livable in case of textile products. These are livable under the additional duties of excise act. Maintain Company Code Settings. These duties are in addition to basic excise duty and special excise duty. It posts the deductible duty to the appropriate CENVAT account. Excise Collectorate: The code of the excise collectorate in whose area the excise registration is located. the system splits the input excise duty on the material into its deductible and nondeductible amounts. which document type the system uses when making CENVAT postings in Financial Accounting (FI). Excise Division: Specifies the excise division in whose area the excise registration is located. Excise range: Specifies the excise range in whose area the excise registration is located. This information is used to split the transfer postings' items into multiple subcontracting challans. Example . tobacco and sugar. Partial CENVAT Credit: Indicates that the excise registration ID is allowed to credit only a portion of its input excise duty to its CENVAT account Dependencies .This information is used when you create an excise invoice in Sales and Distribution (SD) for factory sales and for other movements. It controls.When you post a goods receipt.

Indicates debit accounts can be overwritten.Indicator for providing debit account overwriting Debit Account Overwrite Indicator. The rounding is done at the item level for each item where the amount is greater than 1 Rupee.You can round off the Excise amount to be paid during an outgoing Excise invoice by marking this indicator as 'X'.Excise year start month. Indicator for item level excise duty round off . This start month represents the month for the start of the excise invoice number range. It provides the flexibility to the user to enter the debit account of his choice depending on the nature of transaction. To indicate the method opted by the company for selecting the excise invoice. Any change by the Excise authorities regarding start month should be taken care of by an entry in this field and initialization. If the duty amount is less than one rupee then no rounding is done Rounding off of Excise duty for outgoing excise invoice . X . The excise invoice selection will show the related invoices only for the period 08-03-97 to 28-03-97. Automatic balance Indicator . Example . The calendar month marking the beginning of the excise year. Excise invoice selection procedure :Excise invoice selection type.If the value of this field is 20 and today is 28-03-97. . Days to be considered for excise invoice selection Number of days from document date for excise invoice selection. This will not round off the CENVAT credit to be taken. The month 04 is entered here indicating April of the calendar year as the start month for excise invoices. Number of excise invoices to be selected Indicates the number of excise invoices that needs to be selected in the excise invoice selection. Document type for FI posting on Utilisation Financial accounting document type for TDS posting. It can be either earliest or latest invoices that were received.This indicator is to be used for deciding whether Item level excise duty amount rounding off is required during procurement cycle. Document type for TDS FI posting: Financial accounting document type for TDS posting. If marked 'X' then the excise duty amount will be rounded off to the nearest rupee at the Purchase order level. Use In excise journal voucher transaction.

When you are creating an Excise invoice for export sales then the exchange rate for duty calculation will be picked up using this Exchange rate type. for use in the following year. For each plant: . You can use the average rate for the currency translation.In this activity.Multiple GR for one excise invoice.You enter the exchange rate type to store different exchange rates. CVD Clearing Account .Specify whether it is a manufacturing site or a depot. Example . Exchange rate type . to immediately post half of the input excise duty to the appropriate CENVAT accounts. For each excise group. you maintain excise information relating to your plants. .You can assign the same ID to more than one plant. multiple credit Maintain Excise Groups . . . Single credit .You can use the exchange rate type to define a buying rate. .In this IMG activity.Indicates that the plant in question is a depot. if required.In this IMG activity. you maintain excise information relating to your plants.Multiple GR for one excise invoice.Instructs the system. Maintain Plant Settings . or average rate for translating foreign currency amounts.Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D.Assign it an excise registration ID. .Number of goods receipt per excise invoice. and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation. . Plant Settings .Immediate Credit on Capital Goods . . when you verify a goods receipt for capital goods.Key representing a type of exchange rate in the system. The rest is posted the CENVAT on hold account. Exchange rate type to be used for Export excise duty converts .Specifies which G/L account the system credits when you take a CENVAT credit on countervailing duty in the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction. Depot . you define your excise groups. you can also control how various excise invoice transactions will work. and the bank buying and selling rates for valuation of foreign currency amounts. selling rate.

10. when you post a vendor's . 2. Excise Group Governs which set of excise registers a business transaction will be included in. excise authorities require every business to maintain only one set of excise registers and one set of accounts. 'Automatic posting' when ticked will post the Excise invoice other movements automatically along with creation in single step. Maintain whether this Excise group is for a depot or not. multiple credit'. If your company has only one set of excise registers. If you want to automatically create Excise invoice during Sales cycle at the time of billing the tick the indicator 'Create EI' 5. Alternatively if you want to availa the credit only after all the goods receipts have been made mark it as ' Multiple GR for one excise invoice. single credit'. 'Create Part1 for consumption stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into consumption stock. Assign the excise groups to plants. 11. 8.Excise Groups . 3.Under normal circumstances. Following is the relation between excise group. 4. Then. in transactions involving excise duty. If you receive only one consignment for an Excise challan then you can leave GR's per EI as blank. for example. 7. 1.In define excise groups in Customizing. The RG 23A. multiple books can be maintained. you define excise groups. RG 23C and PLA serial numbers are created for an excise group. plant and registration. An excise group allows you to maintain a separate set of excise registers and excise accounts. . You cannot cancel the selection later. 6. During depot sales if you do not want to do RG23D selection and posting separately and would like to complete RG23D selection in one step mark the indicator 'RG23D Auto post'. If the indicator 'Folio no create' is marked system will generate Folio numbers for RG23D during receipt of excise invoice into depot. 9. If the indicator 'Default GR qty' is marked system will default the Excise challan quantity on to the Goods receipt if the Excise invoice number is given in the pop-up. 'Create Part1 for Block Stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into Blocked stock . Recommendation . This will post the selected records into RG23D automatically. Create one excise group for each set of registers that you need to keep. 'Create Part1 for STO' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material through inter plant transfers.In this activity. then you need to maintain only one excise group. But through exemption from the authorities. If you receive multiple GR's for a given Excise challan and would like to avail multiple credit mark the GRs per EI as 'Multiple GR's for one excise invoice.

Default excise qty in GR . you specify which excise group you are using.Multiple GR for one excise invoice . You need not separately Post the excise invoice Also we can set indicator for creation of part 1 for: . you define the different excise series groups within your company.Instructs the system to automatically create a Sales and Distribution (SD) excise invoice immediately you create a commercial invoice or a pro forma invoice. excise group. At the end of the period. by choosing Excise Group . . .Stock transport order .RG23D Automatic Option if selected will create Depot excise invoice by posting the selection of excise invoices in single step.Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D.If this indicator is marked then while creating Excise invoice for other movements system automatically does the Verify and Post.If this indicator is ticked then while doing Goods Receipt using 'MB01' system will default the excise invoice quantity on to the Goods receipt document.Consignment stock Maintain Series Group .In this IMG activity. Single Credit Create Excise Invoice Automatically . Indicates that the plant in question is a depot.If you want to make use of this function.Blocked stock . Series groups allow you to maintain multiple number ranges for the outgoing excise documents. If you need automatic posting of RG23D selection then the Post Goods Issue should have been completed before running RG23D selection.GR Per Excise Invoice . .Series Group Determination. The excise invoice is created in the background. you must also define the default plant. Based on excise regulations and . If this is not selected then you need to separately do RG23D selection followed by PGI and then RG23D verification and posting. you create different sets for each excise group.excise invoice. and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation. Multiple credit . and series groups in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD). Folio number for depo Posting .Multiple GR for one excise invoice . This information tells the system which G/L accounts to post the excise to. RG23D Sales Creation and posting option . when you come to prepare your excise registers.

. the system immediately pays the amount from CENVAT and creates the Part II entry. If you have both fortnightly and immediate utilization for the same excise group.No utilization Flag If you do not need any CENVAT utilization for an excise invoice but would like to just generate an excise invoice then you need to mark this indicator. If the flag is checked then system will create an Excise invoice in the given Series group but there will not be any account postings or Part2 postings. you specify which tax procedure you want to use for determining excise duties and sales taxes on input materials in India. IMG > Logistics . . But each of these series has to be declared to the excise authorities.If you use condition-based excise determination. and group 002 for 57 F4 documents.If you use formula-based excise determination.Define excise series groups based on type of outgoing document .Specifies that when you create an excise invoice. Account determination for immediate payment will be done exactly the same as being done for fortnightly utilization program. so that you can work with both concurrently.If no financial postings are required for an Excise invoice in this seris group then you tick the 'No utilization' indicator.Assign series group to excise registration ID .In this IMG activity. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINN. group 001 for excise invoices. Such invoices will not be listed for fortnightly utilization. This tax procedure also supports condition-based excise determination.If the CENVAT has to be paid immediately and you need not wait for the Fort nightly payment then mark the 'Immediate Utilization' Iindicator. . .No account postings for CENVAT in sales cycle . Immediate Utilization of CENVAT .You could define two series groups. Maintain Excise Duty Indicators . you maintain the excise duty indicators. the account determination within CIN IMG should point to the ED interim account. Example .exemptions from the authorities you can maintain multiple number series for outgoing documents. .General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Select Tax Calculation Procedure In this IMG activity. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINJ. .

such as which vendor you purchase a material from. fill out all of the fields as follows: . . Since the exact rates of excise duty can vary on a large number of factors. Note that once you have started using a tax procedure. otherwise you will not be able to display old documents. If you use condition-based excise determination. special excise duty. Maintain Excise Defaults . a purchase order. the system applies the excise duty at the rates you have entered in the condition records. and cess.We strongly recommend that new customers use condition-based excise determination.In this IMG activity. or which chapter ID the vendor stocks the material under. you create condition records for every sort of excise duty. . additional excise duty. field and leave all the others blank. you cannot switch to another one.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Condition-Based Excise Determination When you enter a purchasing document. Features : The standard system comes with two tax calculation procedures. TAXINN is only supports condition-based excise determination.Specify the countervailing duty condition type used for import purchase orders. fill out the CVD cond. When you come to enter a purchasing document. whereas TAXINJ supports condition-based excise determination and formula-based excise determination. IMG > Logistics . . you define which tax procedure and pricing condition types are used in calculating excise taxes using formula-based excise determination. Both tax procedures contain condition types that cover all of the excise duties and sales taxes applicable.Specify the purchasing and sales conditions types used for basic excise duty. the R/3 System automatically calculates the applicable excise duties using the condition technique. See also : SAP Library -> Logistics -> Country Versions -> Asia-Pacific -> India -> Materials Management (MM) -> Condition-Based Excise Determination and -> Formula-Based Excise Determination. for example.Enter the tax procedure and the pricing conditions that are relevant for excise tax processing. If you use formula-based excise determination. .Specify the conditions in the sales order that are used for excise rates.

2. Control Code means "chapter ID. by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements Account -> Excise Duties Using Condition Technique and «-> Settings Determination. When the ordered materials arrive. Enter the condition type that you want to create a condition record for and choose . Formula-Based Excise Determination . you post the goods receipt and the excise invoice. Enter data as required.Create condition records for all excise duties that apply. You maintain the following types of data: .Plant master data . 6. The system then calculates the excise duties using the condition records you have created. The system posts the excise duty to the appropriate accounts for deductible input taxes when you enter the excise invoice. enter the dummy tax code that you have defined. In the command field. for example. the system automatically calculates the duty for you. select Country/Plant/Control Code. 3. and enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each. . Master Data . Creating Condition Records for Excise Duty 1. Choose . 5. and chapter ID. Select the combination of objects that you want to create the condition record for. which you can Master Data®access from the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing Indirect Taxes Excise Rate Maintenance. On the dialog box. you must have maintained all the data on the Excise Rate Maintenance screen. enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each line item. to create a condition record for a tax that applies to a combination of country. 4.In the Tax Code field.When you execute a business transaction involving materials that are subject to excise duty. In order for the system to be able to determine which rate of excise duty to apply. Save the condition record. Day-to-Day Activities . enter FV11 and choose .Customizing : Make the settings in Customizing Basic -> India -> for Logistics ± General.When you enter a purchase order or other purchasing document. plant. The Key Combination dialog box appears. These activities include one activity where you define a tax code for condition-based excise determination." So.

You can use the same indicator for all the plants with the same excise status from a legal point of view. you must customize your system accordingly. such as all those that are in an exempt zone. You must also stipulate if the vendor qualifies as a small-scale industry. If your business only qualifies for partial CENVAT credit. Again. Looks up the plant master data to see what status you have assigned the plant. . you then create a final excise duty indicator. for each permutation of plant indicator and customer indicator. Let¶s assume the chapter ID at plant for the ball bearings is 1000. . The system looks up the table under Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer to see what the final excise duty indicator is for customer status 3 and plant status 2: It is 7. Let us consider an example to illustrate how the system determines which rate of excise duty to apply to a material.Excise tax rate For every chapter ID and final excise duty indicator. . For each permutation of plant indicator and vendor indicator. 5. You must also specify the vendor type ± for example. your plant has status 2.Customer master data Similarly. See also the information about manufacturers that are only entitled to deduct a certain portion of the duty (see Partial CENVAT Credit). you maintain the rate of excise duty. you assign the same excise duty indicator to each of your customers that share the same legal excise status. Let's assume you've assigned the customer status 3. . Looks up the customer master data to see what status you have assigned the customer. Similarly. Finally. you define an excise duty indicator. The system determines the chapter ID of the ball bearing for the plant. Assume you are posting a sale of ball bearings to a customer. The system automatically determines the rate of excise duty as follows: 1.You assign each of your plants an excise duty indicator. the system looks up the table under Excise Tax Rate to see what rate of duty applies to chapter ID 1000. .01 under status 7.Material master data Each material is assigned a chapter ID. 4. you then create a final excise duty indicator. 3. a depot. whether the vendor is a manufacturer.Vendor master data For each of your vendors with the same excise status from a legal perspective. or a first-stage dealer. 2.01.

. Do not make any other settings for it. Requirements . the system only uses the condition types that you enter here. when you create a purchasing document.MWS (central sales tax) . use the condition types contained in the tax procedure.For taxes on sales. The system uses this information when you create a document from another one. use the condition types contained in the pricing procedures. The standard system comes with sample settings for the tax calculation procedures and pricing procedures. you define a tax code for the purposes of calculating excise duty when you enter purchasing documents.Assign Tax Code to Company Codes In this IMG activity. The accounts for VS1.VS5 (sales tax setoff) . Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination. the system determines the various excise duties in the excise invoice using the information that you have entered here. and VS3 are used as clearing accounts during excise invoice verification. VS2.For taxes on purchases.MW3 (local sales tax) . . In addition. or when you create an outgoing excise invoice from a sales order. .Define Tax Code for Purchasing Documents .You have set up G/L accounts for each of the processing keys listed below.Assign an account to each of the following posting keys.In this IMG activity. For example.VS1 (basic excise duty) . IMG > Logistics . Use these settings as a basis for your own. when you enter an incoming excise invoice from a purchase order. . you specify which G/L accounts you will use to record which taxes. .In this IMG activity. assign the tax code for purchasing documents to the company codes where it will be used.VS2 (additional excise duty) . and set the tax code type to V (input tax).VS3 (special excise duty) .Create a new tax code.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Account Determination Define G/L Accounts for Taxes . Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination.In this IMG activity. Classify Condition Types . you specify which condition types you use for which sort of tax. . Note that this only applies to condition types that you use with the new excise determination method.

Excise TT DC ind Account name . Enter all the accounts that are affected by each transaction type. Note : you need not remit the CENVAT to the excise department immediately. you specify which excise accounts (for excise duty and CENVAT) are to be posted to for the various transaction types..Excise group .ESA (service tax) . There is no separate transaction type for fortnightly payment.Defined the G/L accounts . For most businesses. enter the accounts for each sub transaction type as well. This will be set off when you remit the duty. Example: .GRPO CR CENVAT clearing account . one set of accounts will suffice for all transactions.Defined the excise groups .In this IMG activity.For each excise group. and TR6C for determining the CENVAT and PLA accounts.In this IMG activity.GRPO DR CENVAT on hld account Specify G/L Accounts per Excise Transaction . . you assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts. you can also use sub transaction types. the system determines which G/L accounts to post to by looking at the: .GRPO CR RG 23 BED account .Company code .ESE (service tax expense) Specify Excise Accounts per Excise Transaction .Maintained the transaction accounts Activities . so maintain the credit account for transaction type DLFC as an excise duty interim account. Requirements You have already: . Transaction type UTLZ is used for determining accounts only while posting excise JVs and also if the payment of excise duty has to be done fortnightly.Chart of accounts Furthermore. if you want separate account determination settings within an excise group. If you use sub transaction types. EWPO. The fortnightly CENVAT payment utility picks up the credit side accounts from the transaction types of GRPO. When you come to execute the various transactions. Config setting needed to be done in order to get the Excise Details Screen in Material Master. assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts.

Sales Order type RE). Now in the last sub screen i. no. The setting is in sales order item category and delivery type. which is ³Foreign Trade: Import Data´. Select the same and click on Data Screen in the left frame. 15. Click on tab view sub screen and ensure that the sub screen is blank. 5. . 3. Return material From customer You need to receipt the rejected goods through SD Module (VA01 . 5.e. (Using Sales Order in SD) 2. Once the data screens are exhibited. 4. Go to the last sub screen i. 6.6 you delete SAPLMGD1 ± 0001 and instead add SAPLJ1I_MATERIAL_MASTER and in the screen no. a small configuration step has to be made in Screen Sequences for Material Master. Following document helps you to do this configuration. The steps are as follows : 1. ie. 2205.0001 and select the same.Material Master à Logistics General 1. Save the setting. If the setting is correct in the outbound delivery screen SAP will automatically switch post goods issue button into post goods receipt.e. Select your screen sequence. 2. In the standard system the movement type used is 651. Excise related sub screen appears. Create a Material Master and check whether in Screen Foreign Trade ± Import.SAPLMGD1. SSq. . select data screen no. 7. 6. Create a return request. Go to IMG Define Structure of Data Screen for each Configuring the Material master Screen Sequence. the quantity is placed in blocked stock without value updating. 4. 21and Scrn 15. Select the same and click on Sub screens in the left frame. You will then decide if the return quantity are indeed bad stock or not. After post goods issues receipt is done using outbound delivery.Even though this functionality is available in enterprise version. Usually it would be 21. 3. Create outbound delivery according to return request. 21-15-6 .

and what should we do if a replacement is not issued? A return is a sales document used in complaints processing for when a customer sends goods back.Delivery (returns delivery) . But rather than VL09. or goods that had been delivered for sale on approval. and implement a free of charge subsequent delivery based on the return . you: Post the goods to your warehouse for checking And then. we use project stock (movement type 601 Q for PGI). The return causes the system to: Register the receipt of goods using a returns delivery. VL09 creates the movement type 602 Q. once you have checked the goods and approved the complaint. Transfer Posting from block stock to unrestricted stock (mvt type 453). Credit COGS) 8.Approve the complaint.{T-Code: XK01} In config go to Basis Components --> basis services --> Address Management --> Maintain title texts Do you have a SAP SD Question? What processes are involved with Customer Returns? How do we create a replacement order.Reject the complaint PGI (Post Goods Issue) may be cancelled by Transaction code VL09. Goods Issue to scrap account how to create new titles which can be used in creating the "address" view on the Vendor master.Billing (for creating a credit memo) When you create a return based on a complaint. A return is another type of sales document like a standard order. You enter a return in the system if the customer returns damaged goods. and post the goods to stock (for example.Approve the complaint and create a credit memo . the generally accepted method in . The accounting document is just the reverse of the original PGI document. this will have accounting effect (Debit Inventory. blocked stock). The return triggers the following functions: . implement one of the following activities: .7. Create a credit memo. In my company.

If you do not give replacement. If you have a delivery related invoice. What processes are involved with Customer Returns? How do we create a replacement order. The delivery type for this replacement order type will be LF and billing type F2. A return is another type of sales document like a standard order. and billing. To create the replacement order. you can define an order type by copying from order type OR. You can make reference Mandatory for this order type. "no invoice" takes place. in this process. Create a credit memo. and what should we do if a replacement is not issued? A return is a sales document used in complaints processing for when a customer sends goods back. blocked stock). The return triggers the following functions: .Delivery (returns delivery) . You enter a return in the system if the customer returns damaged goods. "back to the to the storage location. and post the goods to stock (for example. If you do not create a return credit memo. which are then assigned to the item categories. the Customer Account needs to be credited. or goods that had been delivered for sale on approval. In the copy control. Please do not forget to create a Billing document (Formally Return Credit Memo) with reference to return delivery. The movement types are entered in the schedule lines in customizing. When you create a return order type RE. the billing type is picked up as RE (Return Credit Memo) automatically. delivery. once you have checked the goods and approved the complaint. It is very important in order to close the cycle.Billing (for creating a credit memo) . you can create a replacement order. However. your delivery will keep appearing in the "Billing Due" list and with status "Being processed"." The accounting document takes the cost "from" the project and moves it back "to" the storage location.my company for the reverse items is to use the movement type 653. it should be cancelled beforehand. When you are creating a replacement. you can define the relevant item categories from RE to OR. The return causes the system to: Register the receipt of goods using a returns delivery.

Approve the complaint. which are then assigned to the item categories. I am not sure of the usage of price groups in customer master to use for the discount for the customers. you can define an order type by copying from order type OR. you can create a replacement order. In my company. and billing. In the copy control. But rather than VL09. There are 2 types of customers wholesale and retail. the billing type is picked up as RE (Return Credit Memo) automatically. To create the replacement order. implement one of the following activities: . in this process. Usage of price group in customer master Have a business requirement like this: The price group field is used for different discount rates for the customers.Reject the complaint PGI (Post Goods Issue) may be cancelled by Transaction code VL09. However. If you do not give replacement. . the Customer Account needs to be credited. you can define the relevant item categories from RE to OR. delivery. It is very important in order to close the cycle. "back to the to the storage location. Please do not forget to create a Billing document (Formally Return Credit Memo) with reference to return delivery. VL09 creates the movement type 602 Q. If you have a delivery related invoice." The accounting document takes the cost "from" the project and moves it back "to" the storage location. it should be cancelled beforehand. "no invoice" takes place. You can make reference Mandatory for this order type. you: Post the goods to your warehouse for checking And then. we use project stock (movement type 601 Q for PGI).When you create a return based on a complaint.Approve the complaint and create a credit memo . The delivery type for this replacement order type will be LF and billing type F2. When you are creating a replacement. The movement types are entered in the schedule lines in customizing. When you create a return order type RE. The accounting document is just the reverse of the original PGI document. your delivery will keep appearing in the "Billing Due" list and with status "Being processed". If you do not create a return credit memo. and implement a free of charge subsequent delivery based on the return . the generally accepted method in my company for the reverse items is to use the movement type 653.

You are assigning customers E to G in price group 2. . Say there are 10 customers A to J. Now for wholesale you give extra discount and for retail you give less discount. .You are assigning customers A to D in price group 1. Now when you create the sales order with Customer A then he will be getting extra discount But if you create the sales order with Customer B then he will be getting normal discount Price group is a field where you can group certain customers under one umbrella. Customer A belongs to Wholesale Pricing grp and Customer B belongs to Retail Pricing grp. How can I create a customer price group? .You are assigning customers H to J in price group 3 in their respective CMRs. Suppose if you have 3 price groups say price group1 price group2 and price group3. . Maintain a condition record With the help of the Customer / Pricing grp key combination. Price group can be added as filed in pricing condition table and you can maintain condition records for them: In VK11 the table with price group 1 is maintained discount of 5 % In VK11 the table with price group 2 is maintained discount of 6 % In VK11 the table with price group 3 is maintained discount of 7 % So in sales order the customers A to D will get 5 % discount and customers E to G will get 6 % discount and customers H to J will get 7 % discount.Answer: Generally the usage of customer group is to group the customers into One group so that whenever you want to give some additional discount to that customer group then you can give Example : Say you have 2 customers and 2 customers have 2 pricing groups.

in each partner function you must indicate the source partner function. (Here you can customize common sales areas. then. . you obtain the bussiness partner for each partner function. Customer hierarchy setup. In the partner procedure. All subnodes in the hierarchy below that customer. you have to have a Partner Procedure with a partner function for each level. in the order. at the header level. Transaction code --> OVSL Customizing Customer Hierarchy in SD How to configure and maintain the SD Customer Hierarchy? All the customizing is in SD/Master Data/Bussiness Partner/Customers/Customers hierarchy 1) Define hierarchy type: just put and ID and a name to the new hierarchy. in the orders. This might be useful when for example you create a condition discount for a customer that is part of such a hierarchy structure. 5) Assigning hierarchy type for pricing: you indicate which classes of documentos uses hierarchy in pricing determination. 3) Assign acount groups: you indicate which accounts groups are allowed for being part or your hierarchy. firstly decide the hierarchy type to be used. The standard is type A.Please go through this IMG path then define the Customer pricing group. will thus receive the same discount. just for not having to build de hierarchy in all the different sales areas). With this informacition. SPRO --> IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Basic Functions ------> Pricing --> Maintain Price relevant master data fields ---> Define Pricing group for Customers. 2) Set partner determination: if you want to user the hierarchy in price determination. 4) Assign sales areas: symple you indicate wich sales areas are allowed in your hierarchy. It is possible to maintain so called customer hierarchies.

but you don't need that right? Next assign your customer account group to the hierarchy type. And enter the combinations that will be allowed for creating the hierarchy. If you use a customer hierarchy you can maintain the discount for the partner in the top of the hierarchy and in this way it will be valid for all customers in the hierarchy. . Under SD . the product hierarchy helps in defining the product composition. Unilever does have different locations / businesses and you have to maintain the discount for all customers. The third set of characters could indicate the color of the car. So enter the ship to account group and enter the payer account group as the higher level. The next set may determine its engine capacity and so on. The product hierarchy is used for evaluation and pricing purposes. You must also make an entry for permitted sales area assignments. SAP SD Tips by : Sam Basic SD Questions On Product Hierarchies What is the significance of product hierarchy? Alphanumeric character string for grouping materials by combining various characteristics. The first four characters 0001 could indicate that the product is a car. a product hierarchy could be 00010002000300040005. The next four characters could indicate 0002 the plant in which the car has been manufactured.customer hierarchy You use for example customer hierarchy when you have an company like Unilever and you agree both on a discount. So if you want to a hierarchy for customers in the same sales area then enter the sales area and enter the same one as the higher level sales area. Thus. You want to assign a ship-to to a payer.master data . Product hierarchy thus define the product and its composition.business partners .You can also assign a partner function to the customer so that the higher level customer in the hierarchy is copied into a sales order as a partner function . All these settings can be found in the IMG. A product hierarchy is an alphanumeric character string which consists of 18 characters at the most. To take an example.customers .

The hierarchy is broken down into specific levels. Explain the use of product hierarchy and the step by step procedure to define and use it? Product Hierarchy is used for Profitability analysis. You can have maximum of three level in SAP for a product. You can define the product hierarchy in IMG settings from the following path Customizing is to be made in: IMG -. A product hierarchy is recorded by the sequence of digits within a hierarchy number. When a sales cycle happen then after billing document a PA (profitability analysis) document is created in which product hierarchy is populated and used in CO-PA reporting. You have to give the product hierarchy in Material master Sales.Product hierarchy is defined in tcode v/76 according to levels. This hierarchy can be used in pricing with each level being used as field in the condition technique.Sales Org -2 view. It is used for sales reporting functionality based on the product hierarchy. Thus by assigning the hierarchy number to the material. each level containing its own characteristics. Then it is added as a user defined characteristic in tcode KES1. one can determine a classification of the material. It is used for profitability analysis reporting.Logistics General --> Material Master --> Settings for Key Fields --> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution --> Define Product Hierarchies --> Maintain Product Hierarchy Product hierarchies can be created using code OVSV. The hierarchy number can have a maximum of 18 digits with a maximum number of nine levels. Different material codes can have same product hierarchy (assigned to material master in basic data view). . A product hierarchy is assigned to the material master record.

Product Hierarchy Number of chars at Various level: In the standard system. This hierarchy number may have a maximum of 18 digits with a maximum of 9 levels. The first and second levels have 5 digits and the third level has 8. alto. You can define hierarchy nodes at the individual levels of the product hierarchy. B>> 01 >>01 Then from above example B0101 is the hierarchy for SX4. The maximum number of digits is 18 and the maximum number of levels is 9. The individual levels can contain the following number of digits: Level number of allowed digits: 15 25 38 . A product hierarchy is recorded by the sequence of digits within a hierarchy number. So in that hierarchy many cars come. How To Configure Product Hierarchy Product Hierarchy: Product hierarchies are the domain of materials management. of wood products also.g. zen. This hierarchy is broken down into specific levels. In that many cars come into picture. each level containing its own characteristics.It¶s like if you are having category CAR. The custom Product hierarchies can be maintained in V/76. In this way you can take e. How many levels that product are having. the product hierarchy consists of up to 3 levels. In the standard system. CAR>>MARUTI>>SX4. Swift. It shows the next level of the product. A product hierarchy is assigned to the material master record. The product hierarchy can be structured via DDIC structure PRODHS. a product hierarchy can be created with up to three levels. like variants and all the things.

e. you want to change the number of levels.0. PRODH9. proceed as follows: 1. Create an appropriate domain in the Data Dictionary (type CHAR with the required length).. Assign these domains to the standard data elements PRODH1. category CHAR. . ZPRODH4 with length 3. If you want to change the standard setting of PRODHS. PRODH2. where it is possible to extend the maximum number of levels to 9.g. Change structure PRODHS: Structure PRODHS in the standard system: Structure Fields Data element Category Length PRODHS -> PRODH1 PRODH1 CHAR 5 PRODH2 PRODH2 CHAR 5 PRODH3 PRODH3 CHAR 8 . 2. category CHAR. Proceed as follows: Create the following domains: ZPRODH3 with length 5.This can be changed as of Release 3. Please note that you should use these standard data elements. where n is the position of the field in the structure PRODHS.. Choose ZZPRODHN as field name.. 3. Change the structure PRODHS by creating or deleting fields with reference to the data elements. You want to change the structure of the product hierarchy from 5/5/8 digits to 5/5/5/3.

The user has the opportunity to set an indicator to identify their choice of two different methods (discrete and cumulative allocation) to evaluate the quantities to be considered for product allocation. Please see if the following helps: Configuration Overview.Changes according to example: Structure Fields Data element Category Length PRODHS -> PRODH1 PRODH1 CHAR 5 PRODH2 PRODH2 CHAR 5 PRODH3 PRODH3 CHAR 5 ZZPRODH4 PRODH4 CHAR 3 Please take help of ABAPER in extending the levels of Product hierarchy. All materials that are to be included in the allocation scheme are required to have an allocation procedure assigned to it in the material master. as of release 4.0. The object allows the user to further break down a procedure into smaller parts for future validation of components comprising a specific material .General-> Material Master-> Settings for Key Fields-> Data Relevant to Sales and Distribution-> Define Product Hierarchies We are required to implement product allocation functionality in SAP R/3 (Enterprise Version). Can you kindly help by giving the simple steps for implementation. In addition. it is in the procedure that the method of allocation is defined. Allocation Specific Usage 1. We tried to do the elaborate steps as per the implementation guide but are not successful.Allocation Object (OV2Z) The allocation object is the root level of the allocation process where actual data is entered and planned in LIS. Configure for Product hierarchy at : SPRO-> IMG-> Logistics . 2.Allocation Procedure (OV1Z) The product allocation procedure is the parent of the entire allocation process.

Activate Allocation for Requirement Class (OVZ0) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. In this step. the user has the option of establishing a conversion factor per allocation control record to accommodate BOM listings of constrained materials 6. this functionality is not available. Secondly. If you have de-selected the method field. the user can assign a step level to the procedure and information structure to sequence the order in which allocation quantities are checked. this transaction permits the assignment of an allocation procedure to an LIS information structure. the levels for the collective allocation search procedure are also identified.Activate Allocation for Schedule Line Category (OVZ8) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. 9. Finally. the collective allocation masking character must be generated to allow aggregation indicators to be established.Generate Masking Character (OV7Z) Upon completion of the level determination for the planning hierarchy.Control Product Allocation (OV4Z) In order for the allocation process to function properly. This transaction simply reads the hierarchy established in the planning table and then generates a collective mask character for each level of the hierarchy . Finally. the requirements class must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant. before the required quantity is confirmed 4. 7.Create Planning Hierarchy (MC61) In order to adequately establish allocation quantities. validity periods must be established to indicate when the allocation control records are active.Define Consumption Periods (OV5Z) The allocation consumption periods functionality is only valid if the allocation method flag has been set (OV1Z). the schedule line must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant 8. Secondly. the user must initially determine the level at which the allocation is to take place and the aggregation factor of the allocation quantities. a character is assigned to the information structure to permit collective planning.Allocation Hierarchy Mapping (OV3Z) Primarily.3. The consumption window indicates the number of past and future periods to be used in the allocation check. This functionality allows the user the opportunity to check product allocation against several product allocation scenarios. 5. allocation control records are created primarily to map allocation procedure steps to their corresponding objects so that the allocation data records can be located for validation.

This report simply reads through the data dictionary and selects all the active information structures that contain the field product allocation object (KONOB) as the first field. Finally.Allocation Procedure Assignment to Material Master (MM02) At the root level of the allocation process are the materials. Date. Whether it can send pdf or other file format will depends on the Mail Server you are using. In order to complete the hierarchical set up. This data can then be utilized in the mapping transaction (OV3Z) to link the allocation procedure step to an information structure (previous step). In order entry. Sending a billing document by e-mail First. the collective allocation (mask character) hierarchy must now be maintained with the appropriate aggregation factors 11. you have define the IMG in Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents (Output type MAIL) Program for Sales Order by Customer. the allocation data is verified prior to confirming the line item ordered 12.To create the Sales Order by More no of Date's User's can easily take the Report from this by selecting Different kinds like Customer Specific [And/Or] Sales Organisation Specific [And/Or] duration of date but Here Date is Mandatory Fields user must have to give date as a selection criteria . when a material is entered with a valid allocation procedure in the material master.Modify Planning Hierarchy (MC62) This step is a repeat of MC61 where the initial hierarchy was established. then. The basis people must also maintain the conversion parameters so that SAP knows how to convert the billing documents to be send as a pdf file or other desired format specified by your company. Each material that is to be considered in allocation scenario must be mapped to an allocation procedure. Sales Sales Order by Organisation. your SAP system must be configure by the basis people in order for you to send an external mail.10.List of Suitable Structures (OV9Z) This report is used to identify potential LIS information structures that can be used in the product allocation process. Customer .

Chellavelu on 11. DATA: newsal LIKE sal OCCURS " sales document "Net Value of the SalesOrder "material no. "date. checkbox TYPE c . netwr LIKE vbak-netwr. ch TYPE checkbox.vbpa. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk2 WITH FRAME TITLE text-002. DATA: BEGIN OF sal OCCURS 0.". "curr. matnr LIKE vbap-matnr.01. . waerk LIKE vbak-waerk. vertical cursor position at "PAI available in SYST struc. date5(2). spart LIKE vepvg-spart."Screens.In Second level this report will interact with user where they can select date to see the full Details of Sales Order Selection . SELECT-OPTIONS date FOR vbkd-bstdk DEFAULT sy-datum TO sy-datum OBLIGATORY.2007 8530 732 1000 INR *&---------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Report ZCHE_SALES_ORDER *&--------Done by V. vbeln LIKE vbak-vbeln. dat LIKE vbak-erdat.Output .01. dat LIKE vbak-erdat.Sales Organisation .Date . SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk1. *******************Selection**Screen**Design**************************** SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk1 WITH FRAME TITLE text-001. vapma. DATA: lin LIKE sy-curow VALUE 1.2007 --------------------------* REPORT zche_sales_order .Customer this will be usefull when Selecting the Checkbox Standard Variants .date4(1).vbak. END OF sal.date3(8). PARAMETERS: vkorg LIKE vepvg-vkorg.Sales Order Example Date SalesOrderNo Material Amount Currency 10. 0 WITH HEADER LINE.vbap. vtweg LIKE vepvg-vtweg.vepvg. DATA: amount LIKE vbak-netwr. ****************************Declarations******************************** TABLES: vbkd. date2(15).vakpa.date6(2).

CLEAR amount. WRITE:sy-vline. IF sy-tabix = 1. LOOP AT sal. sal-ch AS CHECKBOX. PERFORM organisation_else. amount. ON CHANGE OF sal-dat. ELSE. ENDIF. CLEAR amount. amount = amount + sal-netwr. IF vkorg <> ''. sal-ch AS CHECKBOX. " To create Application ToolBar for Display Button * To verify Double click on BANU .sal-dat. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF LINE. SUM. PERFORM cus_orga. ULINE. ELSE. sal-netwr UNDER amount. PERFORM cus_orga_else. ENDLOOP. * FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF. WRITE: sy-vline./ sy-vline. ENDAT. amount. WRITE:/ ' Total Amount:'. **********************Interaction with report************************** SET PF-STATUS 'BANU'. ENDIF. * FORMAT HOTSPOT ON. PARAMETERS: chk1 AS CHECKBOX. ENDIF. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk2. WRITE:sy-vline. ELSE. FORMAT COLOR = 3. ELSE. ENDIF. PERFORM organisation. ********************First**Level**Operation***************************** IF chk1 <> 'X'. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 10. * Displaying the contents which is selected from table by * -selection conditions SORT sal BY dat. IF vkorg <> ''. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 20.sal-dat . ENDON. AT LAST. PARAMETERS: kunnr1 LIKE vbpa-kunnr.SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE.

AT USER-COMMAND. newsal-netwr = sal-netwr. by date which is * . newsal-ch = 'X'. PERFORM process. ON CHANGE OF newsal-dat. AT 14 sy-vline. sy-vline. AT 48 sy-vline. ENDDO. lin = lin + 1.newsal-vbeln. EXIT. ENDIF. " This will execute after pressing Display Button CASE sy-ucomm. newsal-netwr. newsal-matnr. AT 14 sy-vline. ENDLOOP.sy-vline.selected by CheckBox FORM process. AT 27 sy-vline. . IF checkbox = 'X'. 'Order NO'. newsal-waerk.newsal-dat. WRITE:sy-vline.newsal-dat. APPEND newsal. WRITE:/ sy-vline.sy-vline.'Order Value(AMT) Currency '.AT 48 sy-vline. newsal-vbeln = sal-vbeln. WRITE:/ sy-vline. ENDCASE. IF sy-tabix <> 1. ULINE.AT 27 sy-vline. ENDIF. newsal-waerk = sal-waerk.AT 27 sy-vline. WRITE: sy-vline. ************************ SUB ROUTINE Area ****************************** *This Process SubRoutine will assign the values from current * -InternalTable (sal) into other IT(newsal). ULINE. WRITE:/ sy-vline. newsal-matnr = sal-matnr. PERFORM selection.sy-vline. LOOP AT sal WHERE dat = dat. IF sy-subrc NE 0. FORMAT COLOR = 1. READ LINE lin FIELD VALUE sal-ch INTO checkbox. DO. ENDON. ENDIF.'Date'. ENDFORM.AT 14 sy-vline. 'Order Material'. newsal-dat = sal-dat. LOOP AT newsal.AT 27 sy-vline. free newsal.AT 48 sy-vline.AT 48 sy-vline. "process *&---------This will display the values for selected dates from new --* *---------------------internal Table (newsal)-------------------------* *& Form SELECTION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM selection. PERFORM datecon. FORMAT COLOR OFF. ELSE. WHEN 'DISP'.

dat = date3. FORMAT COLOR = 3. * DELETE ADJACENT DUPLICATES FROM dat COMPARING dat. SHIFT date2 RIGHT.sal-waerk. date5 = date3(2). CONCATENATE date3 date6 date5 INTO date3. sal-matnr. . ULINE. SHIFT date2 LEFT BY 4 PLACES. "SELECTION * This Date convertion is must for pick the particular Date from the * -displayed line. "DATECON * Here we are doing different kinds of selections by the EndUser's needs *&---------When user selectiong an Sales Organisation-----------------* *& Form ORGANISATION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. lin = 1. FREE newsal. WRITE:/ sy-vline. ULINE. and here we are reversing the Date like YYYY/MM/DD * -because to Check or assign the date we need to give in reverse order *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Form DATECON *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM datecon. newsal-netwr UNDER newsal-netwr. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg. SUM. date3 = date3+4. ENDAT. ENDFORM.'. ENDWHILE. AT 15 'Total Amount for selected month:'. WHILE date2 <> ''. * SORT dat BY dat. date4 = date2+11. date6 = date3+2. sal-netwr. ENDFORM. ENDIF. IF date4 <> '. ENDLOOP. FORMAT COLOR OFF.AT LAST. date2 = sy-lisel(17). CONCATENATE date4 date3 INTO date3.

SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. sal-netwr. "CUS_ORGA *&------------Without Customer by without choosing CheckBox-----------* *& Form CUS_ORGA_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga_else. APPEND sal. ENDSELECT. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln. sal-matnr. ENDFORM. sal-netwr. APPEND sal. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln.APPEND sal. ENDSELECT. "ORGANISATION_ELSE *&------------When Selecting Customer by choosing CheckBox------------* *& Form CUS_ORGA *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga. By Chellavelu .V . sal-matnr.com How To Maintain Output Types in SD ERP SAP ==> SD SAP . APPEND sal. ENDFORM.e All Organisation------------* *& Form ORGANISATION_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation_else.velu@gmail. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date. sal-matnr. ENDSELECT.sal-waerk. "ORGANISATION *&---------Without Sales Organisation i. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~kunnr = kunnr1. sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg AND p~kunnr = kunnr1.sal-waerk. ENDSELECT.chella. ENDFORM.sal-waerk. sal-netwr.

e. The detail procedure for Output Determination is : OutPut Determintaion : Output is a form of media from your business to one of its business partners or it can be within the organization.When I am creating a bill and saving it and then giving issue output to and then header preview. Telex. Should I maintain condition records? Where and how to maintain? For getting any output either by print. Fields will display the fields we have selected in the condition table i. or any media you have to do output determination. Maintain Output Types: AF00: Inquiry AN00: Quotation . Types of Output: Print Output. Select Accesses line item and Go To Fields. 4) Assign condition table to access sequence. E-Mail & EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) --> PRINT OUTPUT: Configuration path: ( following are the steps) 1) SPRO-> IMG-> Basic Functions-> Output Control-> Output Determination-> Output Determination using Condition Technique. Fax. The output can be sent to any of the partners defined in the document. Freight List. Outputs are usually in the form of Order Confirmations. output determination is also carried by Condition techniques. sales doc type. Delivery Notes. the system does not respond. Fax. Determining form of output is output determination. Invoices & Shipping Notifications.>Output Determination for Sales Documents (or you can use output determination for billing documents depending on your requirement). 2) Create Condition Table: select the field Sales Doc Type from field catalog & Save 3) Maintain Access Sequence: 4-digits code & description.

Output device: LP01. go to Control Data. Maintain Output Determination Procedure: V10000 (Standard Procedure). medium. the system determines the recipient of the output from the master record for the specified partner function. Select document type and click on Communication. condition type and leave requirement and manual only columns as blank.e. time. time.BA00: Order Confirmation LD00: Delivery RD00: Invoice Select BA00 & Copy & Rename. Partner to whom the output should be sent. Here mention the output type i. language.print specification Sap Script. You Can Maintain: Languages of Output Partners (to whom you need to send output) Print Program. Select the procedure. In this field. Give the same 4-digit code as given to access sequence. Spool request Name: SD_003. Customer No. Create Condition Records: VV11. medium. Once you press enter you will come across 2 key combinations: Sales organisation/ Customer Number: fill SO. Partner Function Abbreviation. Mention partner function. Determination Rule: link the 6-digit procedure code to doc types. Customer. Suffix 2: order_confir & flag on print immediately. It contains: Sales Orgnisation.layout Assign Output Types to Partner Functions: go to new entries & assign your output type to partner functions. Go to new entries and create your own 6-digit code with description. you can explicitly specify a recipient that will override the . Partner Function (The abbreviated form of the name that identifies the Partner) (During output determination.

Deliveries .code VV31) lease follow the below path: IMG . Path For Output Determination For Sales Documents: Logistics -> Sales/distribution > Master data -> Output -> Sales Document -> Create (t-code VV11) Path for Output Determination for Delivery Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> shipping -> Create ( t-ode VV21) Path for Output Determination for Billing Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> Billing Document -> Create ( t.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping . Time & Language.} Order Type: Document Type. Partner.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping Here select the delivery block that is blocking your order/delivery.Shipping . There must also be a master record for the partner that is specified explicitly.Logistics Execution . Partner Function (abbreviation). Display View "Deliveries: Blocking Reasons/Criteria": Overview DB Delivery block descr Order Conf. Medium.).Execute .dlv 06 No printing 07 Quantity Change Print DDueList SpK SpW . 01 Credit limit 02 Political reasons 03 Bottleneck material 04 Export papers missng 05 Check free of ch. and uncheck if the option Print is checked. Medium. Time & Language.standard partner.

Example : In the case of sales orders that are blocked for delivery because of credit reasons.08 Kanban Delivery Printing block field: Indicates whether the system automatically blocks output for sales documents that are blocked for delivery. SAP Sales Order Processing Overview SAP Sales Order Processing system allowed you to manage customer orders in a logical ways. you may want to block the printing of order confirmations. PS: If the document is exceeds by the credit limit output type will not determine and as well as we should not give the output type in sales order. Note: The particular output that is affected by a delivery block is determined in output control. This paper will introduce to you the various features of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules. Table of Contents Purpose of SAP Sales Order Processing System Integrated Function Modules Business Flow of the SAP Sales Process SAP Sales Organisation Key Fields In Sales Order Transaction Codes In Sales Order Processing Important Master Record Material Master Record Sales Views In Material Master Customer Master Record Sales Unit of Measure Delivery Plant Pricing Master Record . We have to assign the routine 2 to sales order output types and 3 routine to delivery output types to restrict from output if the docuement exceeds by credit limit.

Ch. Table of Contents IMG Menu ± The Starting Point Start of the SAP Sales and Distribution Configurations The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Organization Where does you maintain the Standard Text? The Structure Configuration : Define Distribution Channel The Structure Configuration : Define Division Where is the Division Used? The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Office The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Group Where are the Sales Org. Sales Off and Sales Grp Used? Configuring The Link : Sales Organization Assignment Configuring The Link : Distribution Channel Assignment Configuring The Link : Division Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Office to Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Group to Sales Office Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Org. and Plant Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area to Credit Control Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Business Area Account Assignment Setup Partner Determination Where will the Partner Fuctions be used? Log of Incomplete Items ± Define Incompleteness Procedures Assign Incompleteness Procedures Define Status Groups Configuring SD : Common Distribution Channels . Dist Chl.. Div.Sales Document Flow Goods Movement In SD Stock Overview Availability Checks For Customer Order Credit Management In SD Sales Information System Report Sample : List of Sales Orders Change Logging In SD Similar Interface Output Determination Delivery To Customer Customer Invoice Automatic Accounting Posting Appendix A: SAP User Menu Appendix B: Short Cut Keys In SAP Menu A Step by Step Guide to the SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations This paper will provide you with a step by step guide to the configuration of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules. Dist.

Sales Documents ± Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents Define Order Reasons Where is the Sales Order Reasons used? .Where the Common Distriution Channel was used? Configuring SD : Common Division Where the Common Divisions was used? Pricing : Define Condition Table Where are the Pricing Condition Keys used? Pricing : Define Condition Type Pricing : Define Access Sequences Pricing : Define and Assign Pricing Procedures Customer Pricing Procedure .CuPP Where will the Customer Pricing Procedure be used? Document Pricing Procedure Assign Document Pricing Procedures To Order Types Assign document pricing procedures to billing types Define Pricing Procedure Determination Where are the Sales Order Pricing Procedure used? Pricing : Define Pricing By Item Category Activate pricing for item categories Activate cost determination for item categories Where does VPRS determine the price from? Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Define Checking Group Where are the Availability Checks used? Define Material Block For Other Users Where is Checking Groups Default used? Carry Out Control For Availability Check Define Procedure By Requirements Class Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category Checking Rule For Updating Backorders Define Default Settings Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Output Control ± Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types Maintain Access Sequences Assign Output Types To Partner Functions Maintain Output Determination Procedure Assign Output Determination Procedures Assign sales document items Define Print Parameters Where is Output Type used? Double click on the Output type line item to see the details.

. Dist Chl.Sales Documents ± Sales Document Item Define Item Categories Double click the Item Category to check the settings. Table of Contents IMG Menu ± The Starting Point Start of the SAP Sales and Distribution Configurations The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Organization Where does you maintain the Standard Text? The Structure Configuration : Define Distribution Channel The Structure Configuration : Define Division Where is the Division Used? The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Office The Structure Configuration : Define Sales Group Where are the Sales Org. Ch. Sales Off and Sales Grp Used? Configuring The Link : Sales Organization Assignment Configuring The Link : Distribution Channel Assignment Configuring The Link : Division Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Office to Sales Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Group to Sales Office Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Org. Where is the Sales Order Item Category used? Define Item Category Groups Where is the Item Category Groups used? Define Default Values For Material Type Define Item Category Usage Assign Item Categories Define Reasons For Rejection Where is the Reason For Rejection used? Schedule Lines Define Schedule Line Categories Assign Schedule Line Categories Where is the Schedule Line Category used? Sales and Distribution Transaction Code Flow A Step by Step Guide to the SAP SD Sales Order Processing Configurations This paper will provide you with a step by step guide to the configuration of the Sales Order Processing under the SD modules. Div. Dist. and Plant Assignment Configuring The Link : Sales Area to Credit Control Area Assignment Configuring The Link : Business Area Account Assignment Setup Partner Determination Where will the Partner Fuctions be used? Log of Incomplete Items ± Define Incompleteness Procedures Assign Incompleteness Procedures Define Status Groups .

Configuring SD : Common Distribution Channels Where the Common Distriution Channel was used? Configuring SD : Common Division Where the Common Divisions was used? Pricing : Define Condition Table Where are the Pricing Condition Keys used? Pricing : Define Condition Type Pricing : Define Access Sequences Pricing : Define and Assign Pricing Procedures Customer Pricing Procedure .CuPP Where will the Customer Pricing Procedure be used? Document Pricing Procedure Assign Document Pricing Procedures To Order Types Assign document pricing procedures to billing types Define Pricing Procedure Determination Where are the Sales Order Pricing Procedure used? Pricing : Define Pricing By Item Category Activate pricing for item categories Activate cost determination for item categories Where does VPRS determine the price from? Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Define Checking Group Where are the Availability Checks used? Define Material Block For Other Users Where is Checking Groups Default used? Carry Out Control For Availability Check Define Procedure By Requirements Class Define Procedure For Each Schedule Line Category Checking Rule For Updating Backorders Define Default Settings Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling Output Control ± Output Determination Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents Maintain Output Types Maintain Access Sequences Assign Output Types To Partner Functions Maintain Output Determination Procedure Assign Output Determination Procedures Assign sales document items Define Print Parameters Where is Output Type used? Double click on the Output type line item to see the details. Sales Documents ± Sales Document Header Define Sales Document Types Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents Define Order Reasons .

The work process in support projects are given below for your reference.to analyse. Where is the Sales Order Item Category used? Define Item Category Groups Where is the Item Category Groups used? Define Default Values For Material Type Define Item Category Usage Assign Item Categories Define Reasons For Rejection Where is the Reason For Rejection used? Schedule Lines Define Schedule Line Categories Assign Schedule Line Categories Where is the Schedule Line Category used? Sales and Distribution Transaction Code Flow SAP Tickets . Each and every seviority as got its time limits before that we have to fix the error. 3.What Is That? Handling tickets is called Issue Tracking system. . 1. Each one of the support team is a part of support group. The customer or the end user logs a call through any tool or by mail (RADIX). The errors or bugs forwarded by the end user to the support team are prioritized under three seviority High.to actuate and to give the right solution in right time. The main job of the supporting consultant is to provide assistance on line to the customer or the organisation where SAP is already implemented for which the person should be very strong in the subject and the process which are implemented in SAP at the client side to understand. Medium and Low. The issues or the tickets(problems) which are arised is taken care of on priority basis by the support team consultants.Where is the Sales Order Reasons used? Sales Documents ± Sales Document Item Define Item Categories Double click the Item Category to check the settings. 2.This is the job of the support consultant. Whenever a customer logs a call he /she has to mention to which work group (by name).

You do the change and Request one more Transport to BASIS for QA client. BILLING). Once the calls came to the work group the support consultant or the team need to send an IR (Initial Response) to the user depending upon the priority of the calls. . every ticket has the particular deadline alert so your responsibility is to finish it before that deadline. Tickets usually occur during the implementation or after theimplementation of the project. Now you need to solve this ticket. then the end user will test it in the QA client and after approval the BASIS consultant has to transport it to the PRODUCTION client. High. He raises a ticket and the priority is set in one of the below: 1. You would analyze the problem and identify that the SP configuration has to be done for the new plant. we should give "TICKET" to you for not knowing it. Then it is informed to the end user/customer/super user about the changes which have moved to the production server by CTS process. debugged by the support consultant or the team. (Top. Low 2.None) 5.Med. The End user will test the same by creating a sales order for the new plant and approve it. Medium 3. Then the error is fixed. In summary. since shipping point determination is not happened . These are the process.High. To begin with . Create Sales order for a customer from a New plant .4. An example: Tickets in SD can be considered as the problems which the end user or the employee in the company face while working on R/3. There can be numerous problem which can occur in the production support and a person who is working in the support has to resolve those tickets in the limited duration. ( Without Shipping point the document becomes INCOMPLETE and he will not be able to proceed further like DELIVERY. Then after testing properly by generating TR(Transport Request through the basis admin) 6. Here is an eg of a ticket raise: End user is not able to 1. what I understand is that if any configuration or customization is required to solve the issue.Low. then the consultant have to work on DEV Client. You would request a transport for DEV CLIENT to BASIS.

) and for each ticket there will be a severity for example business critical issues or problems may be treated as high or top . sreen shots of the error etxc. For example an IT Organization providing support of SAP / other software / hardware has a agreement. Om Prakash. problem. customer contact details. High priority incident has to be resolved on 10 hours. *Or in details description:* SLA are Service Level Agreements to resolve the tickets by the market. For instance you could have defined the following SLA levels For example: Gold: Reaction time = 30 minutes.Anu radha SLA's are nothing but Service level agreements. resolving time = 4 hours Silver: Reaction time = 4 hours.Service Level Agreement What is maintaining SLA in production support? SLA is an abbreviation for "Service Level Agreement".Finally. Once the change is deployed in production the TICKET is closed. For example: if your company follows a ticketing process(a ticket is nothing but an environment contains complete description of the problem which contains Short description. SLA means Service Level agreement. These are defined in project preparation phase and client would have made an agreement with the company for the level of service. This can be for example categorized based on criticality of the incident. You would get some real issues with severity HIGH in your day-day support. Medium priority incident has a 3 days time to resolve etc *-. It means to have guaranteed reaction or resolving times for incidents (= trouble tickets). The SLA's are applicable in Production as well as maintanence support projects. What I have given is a small example. you request a transport to move the changes to PRODUCTION. resolving time = 24 hours SLAs normally are part of a contract between a customer and a service provider. It is the service agreement between a Company and a service provider. Biswajit Sarangi What Is Maintaining SLA .. Prabbath. Tips by: Sourav.

The Functional Spec (Specification) which is a comprehensive document is created after the (SRS) Software Requirements Document. that is detchnical developement process. PRT --.Problem response time ----.severitie's. The Functional Specification defines what the functionality will be of a particulat area that is to be precise a transaction in SAP terminology.initial problem response time --. Elsewhre organizations combine these two documents into a single document.this is nothing but time taken to solve the issue or problem. 2. What Are Functional Specification in SAP? To speak at macro level that is at projet manager or at senior levels. The Functional Specification document to create a detailed design document that explains in detail how the software will be designed and developed. It provides more details on selected items originally described in the Software Requirements Template. The Functional Specification describes the features of the desired functinality. Both IPRT and PRT will be different for different severitie's. . At the consultant level the functional spects are preapred by functinal consultants on any functionality for the purpose of getting the same functinality designed by the technical pepole as most of the times the functionalities according to the requirements of the clients are not available on ready made basis. b) Clearly and unambiguously provides all the information necessary for the technical consultants to develop the objects. IPRT --. SLA's has two important time specifications 1.and contains the technical information and the data needed for the design and developement. It describes the product's features as seen by the stake holders.. In those case your company or your team has to deliver the solution to the customer in agreed time limit or otherwise you might end up missing SLA's.this is nothing but time taken to respond to the problem. The functional specification translates the Software Requirements template into a technical description which a) Ensures that the product feature requirements are correctly understood before moving into the next step.

and it always depends on the type of business which is opting for SAP.Responsible for any enhancements . 4) Functional consultant has more configuration knolwledge then Business consultant.Let me throw some light on documentation which is prepared before and in a project: 1) Templates 2) Heat Analysis 3) Fit Gap or Gap Analysis 4) Business Process Design 5) Business Process Model 6) Business Change & Impact 7) Configuration Design. analyse and solve the issue .have different names 8) Future Impact & Change Assessement 9) Functional Design (Module Wise) 10) Risk Assessement 11) Process Metrics and Many More-.When an issue comes diagnose.Writing functional specs and interacting with Abapers to develop any user exits . which is just 5 % of Total SAP. 2) Functional consultant know more about business process unlike Business consultant.Rocky The responsibilities of a support consultant are: . Fahad Role of a mySAP Functional Consultant What are the differences between a functional and business consultant? The difference between Functional consultant and Business consultant are as follows: 1) A funcitonal consultant is able to configure the system unlike business consultant.Which has impact on Business and its work flow Note * This documents are preapared in Vanilla SAP Standards -. Tips by: Madhuuri. 3) A business consultant will bring business process knowledge and provide it to functional consultant who in turn used this knowledge to configure the system.Primarily responsible for Handling tickets and application support to the endusers . *-.Things differ from one implementation to another.

he identifies the use cases and transforms them into logical and technical views. a feeling for defects and general a common sense. Role of a Functional Consultant in an End To End Implementation When you talk about the role of a Functional consultant in an end to end implementation. transforms the essence into an abstract and algorithmic business model. Hence. in all we can say getting through with current business setup. The main duty of a consultant is to transfer external know-how to the client. I think it won't be possible for me or anybody to define everything but I will try to summarize it: 1. design current business flows. It is not manpower that counts but intelligence. all this forms the part of AS IS document. study current business processes and its complication. The consultant documents the settings and prepares proper guidelines that allow other consultants to do further changes or repairs with due efforts. performing appropriately and the business flow is complete and correct. understanding of processes. During go live he assists the technical staff by testing the behaviour of the system. Functional consultant is expected to generate knowledge about the current business process. The consultant takes care that proper training is given to the users and that the system is usable. Below is one view: A functional consultant evaluates the demands in talking with the customer's representatives.. most of the time in Vision format. . After go live he guarantees that the procedures remain usable and consistent in real live situation and proposes enhancements.Training the end users and preparing end user training material Sistla *-- For those who wished to know the role of a functional consultant. Flow diagrams and DFD are prepared. Then the main task starts: customizing the respective business area and making sure the system reacts in the manner according to the constraints of the requested use case.

ASAP stands for Accerlated SAP. The project normally starts off with a Kick off meeting in which the team size. FICO etc. methodlogy. MM. working hours which have been predicided are formally defined. it won't be possible for me to explain it here. there will be test script based on that testing will be performed. the DFD/ERD are prepared. What is the role of SD Consultant in Testing while implementing the project? 2. 3. Unit testing is refer to the module which are going to implement. 6. reporting system. dates and schedules. 5. Sometimes Functional consultants are also expected to prepare test scripts for testing the configured scenarios.Consultants. team members. They will test whether the output documents such as purchase order. gap analysis and configuration is done. I have seen people defining integration after mapping. Before starting configuring future business processes in SAP. reading it from there won't give you a great knowledge about ASAP but will obviously get you to know the definitions of various term. responsibilities. these have to be then approved by the team leads or who ever the consultant is reporting to. . it is a simultaneous process. ASAP. 4. but as per my experience in implementation. duties. Role of SAP Consultant In Testing 1. SD. this documentation is called TO BE. invoice document are printed in the required format and showing the correct data. End user manual and user training is also expected from F. Everything configured has to be documented as per their categories in the form of predefined templates. which SAP prescribes but is not mandatory for any company to follow. you can find all the steps on SAP site. such as IBM follow some blue Methodlogy. What is Unit testing and Integration Testing? Testing : the core team members along with endusers will test whether the postings done in SAP is resulting as per the requirements of the organisation. some companies follow typical SDLC steps. Mapping and GAP analysis is done for each module. but all I can tell you about it is that it is SAP standard implementation methodology.2. through google. which can be also siad as the result of mapping and gap analysis.

g. and you will be testing using test cases which give a full cyclic test from order to invoice. MM-SD-FICO for example. we do have 1-create order. Performance Testing 5. delivery and TO. Usually it is done using software. System Integration security Testing 4. User Acceptance testing 6. User Acceptance Testing: Refers to Customer testing. Whrereas System testing you will be testing the full cycle with it's integration. So we will be testing 1. Like e. We use different software during testing. If BPP defination says 5 seconds for PGI then it should be 5 and not 6 second. in SD standard order cycle. We will be incorporating defects that are coming during these testings using different test cases. Security testing you will be testing different roles and functionalities and will check and signoff. Regression Testing Unit testing is done in bit and pieces.4 and 5 seperately alone one by one using test cases and test data. The user test model is comprised of a sub-set of system integration test cases. We will not be looking and checking/testing any integration between order and delivery. which combine various business processes. Performance testing is refered to as how much time / second will take to perform some actions. preparing test plan and then recording the progress. Regression testing is reffered to a test which verfies that some new configuration doesnot adversly impact existing functionality. This will be done on each phase of testing. like e. Integration testing is also called SIT ( System integration testing) Testing mathologies and types: there are 6 types of testings: 1. PGI. The UAT will be performed through the execution of predefined business scenarios. Unit Testing 2.2. then 3-transfer order. TO and PGI and then invoice. System Testing 3.g. then 2-delivery. then 4-PGI and then 5-Invoice.Integration testing will be cross the modules. Most commonly use are Test Director: which is used to record requirement.3. .

This is an automatic tool.Volume Testing . custom program. or interface. system settings or a custom development (it may follow the technical unit testing) These usually use actual data or data that is masked but essentially the same as a real data set. development or functionality will touch or integrate .Functional Unit Testing . A successful test shows that the development or configuration works as designed and the data is accurate as a result. IntegrationTesting= Testing a process. or any systemic problem. I would also note that when a new implementation is being done you will want to conduct at least one cut over test from the old system to the new and you should probably do several. the test usually consists of a test data set that is processed according to the new program. Functional Unit Testing= Test of configuration. Volume Testing= testing a full data set that is either actual or masked to insure that the entire volume does cause system problems such as network transmission problems.Mercury Load Runner: is used for performance testing. A successful test only proves the developed code works and that it performed the process as as designed. What kind of testings that are carried out in testing server? . The test should examine all data involved across all modules and any data indirectly affected. A successful test indicates that the processes work as designed and integrate with other functions without causing any problems in any integrated areas. A successful test indicates that the processes will not slow or crash the system due to a full data set being utilized. A successful test will show identical results when both the legacy system and new system results are compared. system resources issues. Parallel Testing= Testing the new system or processes with a complete data set while running the same processes in the legacy system.Parallel Testing? Technical Unit Testing= Test of some technical development such as a user exit.IntegrationTesting .Technical Unit Testing . development or configuration within the context of any other functions that the process. What does the following terms means : .

1. Gregrobinette What is the Difference between Consultant & End users? SAP consultant role is to build the system. Integration Testing ( Along with other integrated modules) The 3 types of testing is as follows:1. Individual Testing ( Individually which we've created) 2. SAP End user only use the SAP system just to fetch some info. So a end user is just using the final product which it is meant for and consultnat design the product/updation and modification.. Unit testing (where an individual process relevant to a SD or MM etc is tested) 2. or to create new thing. Stress testing (where lots of transactions are run to see if the system can handle the data) Tips by: Teresa Pittari. we do come across entire Org Management creation by an end user after the Personnel strucutre is created. Initiallly the OM is created by sap consultant .like this small things are always done by the enduser.. similarly new job and position. The entire work of OM is purely depends upon the enduser.. Regressive Testing ( Entire Process) 3. this has to be created by the enduser rather than depending up on the implementor. Roles and Responsibilities of End User: Using the software at the end or after the implementation is an End User.. . 3. In course of time a new department has appeared in the company of the client . creation Job and Position and its occupancy is with in the limits of an enduser. The roles and responsibilities of end users is working in easy access menu they will not have authorizations of using img settings if they get doubt they will send query to the implemented company and just entering day to day transactions. Integration testing (where a process is tested that cuts across all areas of SAP). changes & modification/updation in currently installed SAP system for the end users. In sap HR . OM objects like creation of Org Unit means functional area or dpt .

During the SAP Implementation Project. The SAP consultants will then train the core team members for how to use the SAP system.. Such as posting an invoice. Sushil Pandey. Power Users are users with advanced knowledge in certain applications and with special permissions or roles. What Are SAP End User Manual It is the same for every other modules although here I reference it mainly for SAP HR. that will describe the format of the AS-IS documentation wherein the core team members will write the different processes of the company into these documents and submit it to the SAP Consultants. The consultants will be providing the core team members with templets. creating purchase orders. The main aim is to map the companies processes into the system. or end user. They work in the specialist departments in the company and are available to other users as contact persons. Like this lot of roles are there for an end user. what is the Role of Core Team Membere & Consultants? The main responsibility of the core team member will to impart knowledge about the companies processes to the SAP Consultants. sales orders etc. Somasekhar Explain what are the job responsibilities of END user & POWER user. Whatever the problems come across during the enduser utilisation of sap .. consultant. . administrator. End user is the one who performs transactions in SAP after it goes live. Nitin. One would need user id and password to access SAP be it a developer. goods receipt. The SAP consultants will then start mapping this into the system and provide the best possible solution that can be incorporated using the TO-BE documents.After from this running periodical payroll and Ensuring of the Time schedules ( Work Schedules) of each employee is done from sap easy access by an enduser and the show run of payroll everymonth is by the enduser only.that will reach as ticket to the support team Tips by: Pascal.

Navigation path . .1) You should understand which targeted group for the end-user training is for. Do they have any computer background or not. D) Prepare a book a table and columns which should have the following information: .Expected Result . B) All the transaction codes used by end user. End Users are not permanent. .Achieved Result . If they get any better job outside they will resign and go out.Sl.Transaction Code .NO.user and give the solutions (ready to use) These problems you can come across while giving the in house training for the endusers. That is why implementing company( Client ) expects SAP Consultants to prepare documents which are self explanatory (even to a layman in SAP) and study themselves and use the sap easy access very comfortably. Hence we should prepare a document which explains the following things comfortably: A) All the buttons and Screens we have in sap and its importance for an end-user. C) The STEP by STEP usage methodology with screen shots and explanatory foot notes for each Transaction code.Use of the Code . again the end-user team disappears after some time. 2) In what way they are going to make use of the manuals supplied to them during the course of training.Remarks/Any Comment E) Highlight the common troubles during the usage of SAP by an end. You just place them at one place and publish it for their usage in future for any of their new joinees as an end-user. F) Every consultant is aware that the entire Organsiational Management is with end user only. Means consultant should train the end user in entire OM. Even if you train them well. Let us focus on how to prepare manuals: In the client side .

PA40 etc. J) Glossary of terms and expansion of Acronyms. Emp Sub Group. but merely the opinions of a few agents that we asked.. Like this each consultant should focus on end user training and prepare the documents. PA30. even taking into account offshore outsourcing and Fast Track Visa Workers. *-. Abbreviations should be given. Personnel Area And Sub Area etc. When an employee is hired into the company . Personnel Area and Sub Area and its importance and relevance to their company so as to understand while processing them from the end. For example : info type 0001 Org Assignment insists about the three structures of the HR. I) Demo. don't worry.. Like this whatever comes across in SAP Easy Access should be insisted through the training of end users. I'm sure if we'd polled others the list might have been slightly different. Skills on the Up We polled a number of agents and other sources of information and came up with the following skills that are likely to be on the up over the next few years. If you have a highly valued skill that isn't on here. 1. this is not definitive.Net 3.Somasekhar The top ten IT skills to have for the next few years This is not a scientific survey. at good rates. should allotted. now the end-user in a position to understand which employee group and subgroup. .. H) Each field in the international infotypes should be explained very clearly and ensure that they are comfortable with the fields of infotypes which have been configured for their company. Anyone with these skills is likely to be employed. J2EE 2. exercises and solutions should be provided in the manuals. C# 4. Project Management . We should explain each sub field like Emp Group.G) We should inform the importance of info types and usage for our purposes at expert mode.user point of view . but merely the opinions of a few agents.

CICS. and anyone who has them should stand in good stead. Business Analysts are also less immune to offshore outsourcing. It's good to see Project Management up there. NT Novell 10. Oracle 8 and 9i 6. There is still quite a lively market for PL/I though. Those where you might find it a bit of a struggle in the next few years are the skills from before the previous downturn like Cobol. Oracle continues to be very strong. SAP 7. DB2 etc. VB. Business Analysis 8. Honourable Mentions Other skills that also received honourable mention for the future are some of those from before the downturn such as:SQL Unix C++ VB Access ASP In fact SQL. and is also expected to gain even more market share in the coming years.5.net 9. as they have to remain reasonably close to the business users. . It is a much underrated skill. Siebel also gained an honourable mention. Java New Hot Skills The top three are definitely becoming very hot skills. Unix and C++ are still the most sought after skills currently. SAP continues to do well and is taking market share from its rivals.

Select ->extended-> allow other users in network. this is not a definitive list. 100 MB SAP GUI + temporary free space for the installation) The file C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\etc\services (Windows 2000) or C:\Windows\system\32\drivers\etc\services (Windows XP) must not include an entry for port 3600.9 GB SAP data. ********* . Select remote desktop within extended configuration menu. The Network must be configured for installation and the MS Loopback Adapter must be configured when you start the system without a network connection! Special Requirements for Installations on Windows XP In the file C:\Windows\system\32\drivers\etc\hosts the current IP address and the host name must be defined as <IP address><Host name> Open the network connectivity definition with start->control panel->network connections for defining the network connection. No SAPDB must be installed on your PC. Mini SAP System Requirement and How to Get it Mini SAP System Requirement The system Requirements are : General Requirements Operating System: Windows 2000 (Service Pack2 or higher). but we thought it would be worthwhile to pass on what agents believe to be the skills that they think they will be looking for more and more in the next few years. Windows NT Linux Internet Explorer 5. 2.As I said at the start.2 GB disk space (recommended to have 6 GB hard disk drive space) (120 MB DB software. A possible entry can be excluded by using the symbol '#'. The hostname of the PC must not be longer than 13 characters.01 or higher At least 192 MB RAM (recommended to have 256 MB of RAM) At least 512 MB paging file At least 3. Activate new configurations. Windows XP (Home or Professional).

Keller. controls and Web Dynpro Persistent data: DB access.0 (including a "sneak preview" of Release 7. Class Builder. this 1000+ page book describes all concepts of modern ABAP up to Release 7. Sascha Kruger. dynamic programming. XML). and test tools. ICF. web services. Object Services.10). Procedural techniques are also covered where necessary. you need to buy the following book where in you will get two CD's of SAP WAS (Web Application Server) which can be installed in your system and practice ABAP programming etc. Jacobitz The first complete language reference book for ABAP! This book represents the first complete and systematic language reference book for ABAP Objects. among others. ******* You can get your MiniSAP with the book :ABAP Objects: An introduction to Programming SAP Applications by Horst Keller. class-based exception handling. XML . It also includes the SQL server. assertions.. Object Services. Web Dynpro for ABAP. Based on ABAP Objects. RTTS. data clusters Dynamic programming: field symbols. Regular Expressions. interface technologies (RFC.. Shared Objects. ISBN 0-201-75080-5.What is MiniSAP? How to get Mini SAP? In order to get the free Mini SAP. Object Navigator. dynamic tokens and procedure calls Data und communication interfaces: RFC. SAP Press. selection screens. Brand new topics found in the new edition include SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP. or ABAP Objects Reference Book H. etc. ICF. Basic elements of ABAP Objects Classic modularisation and program execution Avoiding erros and error handling GUI programming: dynpros. lists. J. Highlights: y y y y y y y y y SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP Development basics: ABAP Workbench. file interface. It comes with 2 cds (Mini Basis SAP kernel + database).

if you are a customer of SAP and have an OSS user-id.de/knowledgecat Search for "MiniSAP Basis 4. However. ************** Alternatively. and containing all the example programs from the book. What Is User Specific Parameter Explain what is user specific parameter. Minisap contains only SAP BASIS where you can do your ABAP. User parameter: You can fill fields on screens with default values from SAP memory using parameter IDs. then User maintenance -> Users. the system automatically fills the field Company code with the value µ001¶ on all screens he or she calls. Choose Tools -> Administration.6D November 2000 (English)" (Item nbr. By entering the value '0001' in field COCD in the Parameter register in this user¶s master record (SU01).sap-ag. It will costs you 25 EURO. choose Other Objects.The book also includes two CDs carrying a fully operational SAP Basis System. a user only has authorization for company code 0001. If you want create paramenter id 'TEST' means: . If this company code is not predetermined using a parameter ID in the user master record. For example. so that i can assign the same in SU01? You can do in SE80. then you can also buy the Minisap software directly from the Sap service market. Enter the IDs you want in the Parameter register during user maintenance How to create a new user parameter id . the system automatically adopts the first value entered by the user at the beginning of the transaction for the rest of the current terminal session. : 50043446). Enter name and Create. https://www010. this value has to be re-entered the next time the user logs on to the system Fields on screens are only ever automatically filled with the value saved under the parameter ID of a data element if the Set Parameter/Get Parameter attributes for the corresponding fields have been explicitly set in the Screen Painter.

What are thses User parameter EFB & EVO? What is the full form of this? When it is used? Parameter IDs are used to ease the daily activities of a user. SET PARAMETER ID 'TEST' FIELD LV_TEST. to have this Plant/Pur Group id filled when they calls the related transaction. Successfully Implementing SAP Implementing a package can be a traumatic affair for both the customer and the vendor. In se11 --> Data element name --> Futher Charactersitics --> Parameter Id --> Type name example ZPARA --> Dbl click in it and create.You assign default values that you have maintained in the Customizing to a particualt user by entering the key of the default value in the user master record under the parameter ID "EVO". . For example: If the user is responsible with one Purchasing grp/Pur Org/Plant then they adds WERKS/EKGRP parameter here. Get it wrong and the vendor may get paid late or have to resort to lawyers to get paid and tarnish their reputation.This parameter id will define certain Purchasing authorizations For one or more users. be late or cost a more than budgeted for and take management will take their eye off running their business. Here you can display certain user can display the conditions. They can be included in the T code SU3 in the parameter tab. Parameter IDs are usually only used to memorize certain user-specific settings. STEP 2 : Assign value to paremeter id DATA : LV_TEST TYPE CHAR10.STEP 1: First add value 'TEST' in TPARA Table. EFB . LV_TEST = 'TEST'. For the company the new package may not work the way they expected. To create a Parameter Id for a Data Element. EVO .

Early involvement by the end users is absolutely necessary. They will want to feel involved in its implementation. Complete the GAP Analysis. The Technical Team will prepare the systems environment for the package. 2. moves from stage to stage with all the deliverables being signed off is resourced properly. Have detailed Cut Over Plans. train the users to ensure implementations is smooth as possible into the business. Train the users. This isn't a simple question. The Project Board will meet regularly to ensure that the project plans are created and being executed as planned. Buy in from the end users of the system is absolutely essential if the system is to have a long and stable life in any organisation. The Project Board is part of the governance of the project. re-engineer some of the businesses process to cope with the package. as they will be the ones living with the system for hopefully many years to come. although there are many factors to think about after some consideration for me the top five are way ahead of the others. Set up a Project Board. 4. GAP Analysis A through gap analysis will identify the gaps between how the business operates ad its . implement the software in the best way possible for the organisation set up and tune the software for the particular technical environment. Taking each one in turn: The Project Board The correct set up and operation of the Project Board in my view is major factor in the success failure of the project. apply any software fixes from the vendor. change team and technicians. Secure the resources.end users. The Project Board will consist of the stakeholders. 3.Recently a client asked me what I would consider to be the five most important things one should consider before embarking on an implementation. The Change Team will identify the gaps between the package and the business requirements. 5. My top five factors to consider would be: 1. key users and the vendor. The Resources Three types of resources are absolutely necessary -.

A gap is sometimes spoken of as "the space between where we are and where we want to be. Customer Balances thru F-22 . GAP does not need to be closed. GAP must be closed and customised software can be developed close the gap. For each gap there will be one of three outcomes which must be recorded and actioned. Cut Over Plans Detailed plans need to be developed for cutting over from the old system(s) to the new. you have to only Upload the B/S Items. Actual gap analysis is time consuming and it plays vital role in blue print stage. In information technology. As per that. Unsupportive users will continually undermine the system and eventually it will be replaced. Vendor Balances thru F-43 11. If you goling live at the middle you have to upload the all P&L Account items and B/S Items. Cost Element Master Upload 6. In simple terms: Gap means small cracks. Explain Cutover Activities/Strategies in SAP FI. Therefore the more effort you put into helping the users master the system early the better. GAP must be closed but software cannot be written therefore a workaround is required. G/L Master Upload Thru BDC or LSMW (TC-Fs00 and extended one co code to another company code Fs01) 2. In SAP world. often for the purpose of determining how to get from one state to a new state. Parallel runs of what will happen over the conversion period using test data. G/L Balances Thru F-02 10. existing system or legacy system with Client and new is SAP). Customer Master Upload Thru BDC or LSMW (Will be Taken Care By SD) 4. Asset Master Upload(Thru As90) 5.needs against what the package can can't do." Gap analysis is undertaken as a means of bridging that space. Profit Center Master Upload 8. Cost Center Master Upload 7. gap analysis is the study of the differences between two different information systems or applications( ex. Cutover Activities or Master Data Uploading Strategies Depending upon the when we are going live. convert and watch for a period after wards to ensure nothing unexpected happens. Activities for Golive: 1. If you going live at the financial year start. Vendor Master Upload Thru BDC Or LSMW (Will be Taken Care By MM) 3. Train Users Well trained users will support and defend the system on site. you have to give the information to your core team.

Rollout means ³Inauguration or initial exhibition of a new product´. Customer Advances thru f-29 13. *-. or . rollout is the strategy for international SAP implementation. Check for Partner on Equipment Master (IE01) We have a requirement to check that sold-to partner function is mandatory during equipment creation (IE01).Satynarayana Difference between the User Exit & Gap analysis. This can be done via configuration. its not new functionality which we are trying to build in sap but its slight enhancement within the same code.Whether to implement SAP simultaneously (also known as big-bang) in all the countries.12. Both are quiet a different and has a small relation. As per SAP specific definition. *-. User exits are standard gate ways provided by SAP to exit the standard code and we can write our own code with the help of ABAP workbench. Gap analysis is start point of Realization and once blue print is finished we have to find the realization of sap system for client requirment and there will be certain gaps when compared to system fit. Rollout strategy is the most important decision that a client can make during SAP implementation.Or to go for the combination of both (phased manner implementation for some of the countries and big-bang for others). Normally. steering committee decides the rollout strategy. Sridhar What is roll out of SAP Project? As per dictionary. Rollout strategy normally include the following .Go live in sequence of phased manner . the . Vendor Advances thryu F-48 Before uploading Vendor Balances you have to take care of WHT(TDS) Information. Those gaps can be closed either by re-engineering of business process to fit with SAP or we have to use USER exits in case of small deviations or complete enhancements with the help of ABAP to fit with the SAP system.V. However.

I believe only way to do this is using a user-exit.Leave all other settings to default and save and exit. -> As a first step Make sure to add the Partner view as a sub screen to the very first screen using View profile settings for the equipment category in SPRO. . The user will be forced to enter the sold to party on the screen. However. Explanation Of Purchasing Info Record . ---> Now set this Transaction variant as a standard variant for this transaction. ---> Now create a Transaction variant for the standard transaction IE01 and here select the sold to partner custom type and leave the value field blank.Now on the configuration for the Transaction set the Partner type to be imported with value "SP" and mark the content field to be mandatory. Is there any other user-exit that can be used? Answer: You could check to see if you could read the partner from the memory within the FM. We know of a user-exit IEQM0003 that is allows us to put in logic before equipment is saved. (This will force the partner field to be available directly on the initial screen when a piece of equipment is created). -. This should do the trick.requirement is also to allow users to delete this partner using IE02.However for change transaction (IE02) the user can delete this partner type without any issues. You could use the View profile settings in configuration and transaction variant functionality (SHD0) to accomplish this. Hence they only want the partner to be mandatory during IE01 and not IE02. However you could potentially accomplish the same using the following steps without programming. . this user-exit doesn't have parameters to partner data.

Then only you will be able to create auto PO. For creation auto PO . Automatic If you create info record manually and then create PO manually. Reminders 3. Again if you create a PO for the same material the Price will be picked from the last PO which is updated in info record. it will update the order price history in inforecord ( Env. Creation: We can create info record by: 1. It includes : 1. and the last PO number will be updated. You cannot create auto PO without info record. Availability Period during which the Vendor can supply the material. you have to create info record manually first and then maintain the source list. Manual 2. Planned Delivery Time ( Lead time required by the vendor to deliver the material ) 5. Pricing conditions that you can store for relevant Purchasing Organization or Plant. It will update 'Order price history'----path is 'environment' and 'order price history' in tcode ME13 . Number of last Purchase Order 4. History: If info update indicator is ticked in PO. the price will be picked from the info record. the info record will be created automatically without price updation.Usage: Purchasing Info Record is a source of information for the procurement of certain material from certain vendor. Tolerance Limits for Over Deliveries & Under deliveries 6. If info record does not exists and you create PO manually with info record update indicator set.tab) & not the price in condition record. 2.

Sending: What ME18 (send purchase info record ) does? Network Scheduling In Project System How does the network scheduling happens in PS? Networks and network activities are more suitable for planning resources and scheduling than WBS's and WBS elements. Thirdly about procurement. 2. You will see who created on what date. please go to Extras -> Administrative Data. Check Account assignment tab of sales order. 3. You need to define scheduling parameters in Customizing. Check img path: SPRO -> Project System -> Dates -> Scheduling -> Specify parameters for Network Scheduling Secondly.Logs: Is there a way where you can get to know who create a Purchase Info record? In transaction ME13. 4. Backward scheduling: scheduling starting from the finish date. and the capacity requirements and floats Scheduling types include: 1. For Networks. "Today" scheduling: a scheduling type for rescheduling an order if the start date is in the past. . Scheduling to current date: scheduling starting from the current date. Scheduling calculates the earliest and latest dates for the execution of the activities. Forward scheduling: scheduling starting from the start date. WBS can be assigned as Account Assignment in Sales order.

The valuation variant for the network costing variant determines which price is used for the valuation. for example. When the purchase requisition is activated and converted to a purchase order. . Instead of goods receipts. Externally-processed activities give rise to planned costs equivalent to the prices from the purchasing info record or the price in the activity. which contains prices and delivery times for external processing). This service specification is copied to the purchase order where Purchasing can then modify it. the activity is also shown as a purchase requisition commitment or purchase order commitment. a purchase requisition is also created.When procuring services externally (outsourcing). services are later entered and accepted. Creating such an activity establishes the link to MM Services (MM-SRV). When you create such an activity. Example: You commission a freelance engineer to design and build a machine. You can access data from Purchasing for external processing (a purchasing info record. and processed further in Purchasing. Unlike externally-processed activities. The account assignment category in the purchase order determines whether the goods/invoice receipt is valued .that is. This means that the invoice receipt may correct the actual costs. actual costs are posted to the activity and the commitment is reduced by the amount of the purchase order. you can create services or externally-processed activities. If the goods receipt is valuated. Service activities also give rise to planned costs or purchase requisition/order commitments. Service activities are maintained for the purchase of services. whether it gives rise to actual costs. service activities contain a service specification containing planned activities and value limits for unplanned activities.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful